Palm 200000 PDA With 802.11b WLAN User Manual

Palm Inc PDA With 802.11b WLAN

Contents

User Manual

Handbook for
Palm™ Tungsten™ C
Handhelds
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Copyright
© 2002 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. The Palm logo, HotSync, MultiMail, PalmModem, and Palm OS are
registered trademarks, and the HotSync logo, Palm, Palm Powered, Tungsten, and VersaMail are
trademarks of Palm, Inc. Palm, Inc. uses the Bluetooth trademark under express license from Bluetooth SIG,
Inc., U.S.A. All other brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability
Palm, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this handbook.
Palm assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use of
this software. Palm, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a
result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other
media to protect against data loss.
IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the
accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the
End User Software License Agreement.
Software Download Available
Palm™ Desktop software is supplied on a CD-ROM disc. If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive for
your computer, you can download the Palm Desktop software from www.palm.com/support/.
PN: 407-4891A-US
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
iii
About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1: Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Minimum requirements: Windows computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Minimum requirements: Mac computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Chapter 2: Exploring Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Locating handheld components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Locating front panel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Locating back panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adding an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Adjusting the screen brightness level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Chapter 3: Navigating and Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Using the navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Typing capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Accessing international and special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using the Function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Using elements of the handheld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Using Graffiti writing to enter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Graffiti tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Graffiti alphabet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Graffiti numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Punctuation marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Symbol characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Accented characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Additional non-English characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Navigation strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Contents
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
iv
Graffiti ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Beaming data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using your computer keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Importing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Importing data from a Windows computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Importing data from a Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 4: Working with Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Other ways to open applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Opening expansion card applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switching between applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Categorizing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Changing the Applications Launcher display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Copying applications to or from an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Selecting copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using menu commands and the command toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using the command toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Choosing application preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Enabling and disabling Palm On-screen Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Performing common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Creating records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Editing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Purging records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Categorizing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Sorting lists of records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Attaching notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Choosing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Receiving alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Hiding or masking private records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing and removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing files and add-on applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing applications and files on a Windows computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Palm Quick Install Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Installing applications and files on a Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
v
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Removing Palm Desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Chapter 5: Using Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Creating an Address Book entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Selecting types of phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Changing Address Entry details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Address Book menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Record menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Chapter 6: Using Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Performing calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Viewing recent calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using Calculator menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 7: Using Card Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reviewing Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Renaming a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Formatting a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Managing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Using the Card Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Chapter 8: Using Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Scheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Rescheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting an alarm for an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Scheduling repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Changing repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Considerations for repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the Date Book view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Working in Week view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Working in Month view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Working in Agenda view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Spotting event conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Date Book menus, preferences, and display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
vi
Chapter 9: Using Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Adding expense items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Changing the date of an Expense item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Entering receipt details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Customizing the Currency pick list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Changing the default currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Defining a custom currency symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setting Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Working with Expense data on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Displaying the euro on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Printing the euro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Using Expense menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Chapter 10: Using Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Reviewing memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Using Memo Pad menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Record menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 11: Using Note Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Creating a note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Reviewing notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Changing Note Pad color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Setting an alarm for a note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Using Note Pad menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter 12: Using PalmTM Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Viewing photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Viewing photos in Thumbnail view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Viewing photos in List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Viewing a slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rotating photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Viewing photo information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Organizing photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sorting photos in List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
vii
Creating an album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Filing photos in albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Copying and Moving photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Renaming or deleting an album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Beaming photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sending photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Deleting photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Working with photos on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Using Palm Photos menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Photo menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Chapter 13: Using To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Creating list items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Setting priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Checking off a To Do List item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Changing To Do List item details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Setting a due date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Setting To Do Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using To Do List menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Chapter 14: Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software . . . . . 141
What’s new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Getting started with the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Synchronizing an existing username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Upgrading a MultiMail/VersaMail database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Account and connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Setting up a network e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Creating a network e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Creating a synchronize-only account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Setting VersaMail connection preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Editing e-mail accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Deleting an e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Selecting a different service for a given e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Getting and reading e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
viii
Creating and editing mail folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Creating and sending new e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Working with URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Working with attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Deleting messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Emptying the trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Marking messages as read or unread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a message . . 220
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Configuring an account in HotSync Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Setting synchronization options and account settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Converting attached files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Synchronizing an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Using SSL with the conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Going beyond the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Managing mail filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Managing mail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Adding APOP to an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Adding ESMTP to an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applica-
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Using the command bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
E-mail header details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Backing up mail databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Wireless IMAP folder synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Accessing corporate e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Viewing the wireless coverage indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Troubleshooting account access problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Five-way navigation in the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Chapter 15: Using Palm™ Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Using Palm Web Browser’s features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Palm Web Browser is easy to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Palm Web Browser is fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Palm Web Browser is secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
What Palm Web Browser looks like . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
ix
Getting help in Palm Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Opening Palm Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Browsing the Web on your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Visiting a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Following a link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Returning to a web page you just visited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Returning to your home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Downloading a file to your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Stopping the download process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Refreshing a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Viewing information about a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Bookmarking Your Favorite Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adding a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Visiting a bookmarked page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Editing information about a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Deleting a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Saving Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Saving a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Opening a saved page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Editing information about a saved page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Copying text from a page to another application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Deleting a saved page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Finding Web Pages You Recently Visited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Returning to a page you visited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Clearing the History list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Customizing Palm Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Changing the default size of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Changing your home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Changing how images are downloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Enabling or disabling autofill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Enabling or disabling cookies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Changing the size of the History list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Controlling how Palm Web Browser accesses the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Viewing web content with plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Finding the Palm Web Browser version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Palm Web Browser menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
x
Chapter 16: Using World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Setting the primary location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Choosing a different primary location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Setting the secondary locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Adding a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Modifying a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Removing a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Setting an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Using World Clock menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Chapter 17: Performing HotSync® Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Selecting HotSync setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Customizing HotSync application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Conducting network HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Connecting to your computer through a wireless local area network (LAN)
298
Performing a wireless network HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Performing a cradle/cable HotSync operation: Windows computer . . . 301
Performing a direct HotSync operation: Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Conducting IR HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Preparing your computer for infrared communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Performing an IR HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Returning to cradle/cable HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Using File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Creating a user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Performing the first HotSync operation with a user profile . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Chapter 18: Setting Preferences for Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Viewing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Buttons preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Connection preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IR to PC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Date and Time preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Digitizer preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Formats preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Country default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Time, date, week start, and numbers formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Sounds and Alerts preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
System, alarm, and game sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
xi
Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Keyboard Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Remapping keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Network preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Modem Accessory and TCP/IP software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Selecting a service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Entering a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Selecting a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Adding telephone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Entering a prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Disabling call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Using a calling card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Connecting to your service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Creating additional service templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Adding detailed information to a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Idle timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Selecting Next Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Defining primary and secondary DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Login scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Creating a login script on your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Plug-in applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Deleting a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Network preferences menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
On-Screen Writing preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Enabling Palm On-screen Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Displaying penstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Owner preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Power preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Auto-off delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Cradle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Beam Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Security preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Assigning a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Locking your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Recovering from a forgotten password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Making records private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Setting security options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
ShortCuts preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Contents
xii
VPN preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Connecting to your VPN account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Wi-Fi preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Turning the 802.11b radio on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Finding Wi-Fi connection information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Conserving battery power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Adding and editing a Wi-Fi connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Appendix A: Maintaining Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Caring for your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Battery considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Resetting your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Performing a soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Performing a hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Appendix B: Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Software installation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Operating problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Tapping and writing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Application problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
HotSync problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Beaming problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Recharging problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Security and VPN problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Wi-Fi problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Product Regulatory and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
1
About This Book
This handbook is designed to help you get up and running quickly on your
Tungsten C handheld. It describes all you need to know about how to use your
handheld and the applications that come with it. It describes:
■Enabling wireless features
■Locating all the parts of your handheld
■Viewing and entering data
■Working with expansion cards
■Using your handheld with your computer
■Personalizing your handheld with your own preference settings
After you become familiar with the basic functionality of your handheld, you can
use the rest of this handbook as a reference for performing less common tasks, for
maintaining your handheld, and for solving problems that might arise as you
operate your handheld.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
About This Book
2
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
3
CHAPTER 1
Welcome
Your new Palm™ Tungsten™ C handheld is wirelessly enabled so that you can use
it to transmit and receive information over the airwaves. Use your handheld to do
the following:
■Connect to your corporate or personal local area network (LAN) wirelessly with
a built-in 802.11b radio enabling you to read, compose, and send e-mail on-the-
go.
■Browse or search the Internet through your wireless LAN.
■Stay organized and on time by keeping your appointments, contact
information, and to-do items in one place.
■Wirelessly connect in coffee shops and airports that have LAN service. A service
subscription agreement is required to access these services.
Before you can use all these features, you must set up your handheld and install
software on your desktop computer.
Your handheld comes with an easy-to-follow installation guide, Palm™ Montana™
Read This First, that steps you through the process of successfully setting up your
handheld. The guide contains important information that must be followed for
initial setup of the features available on your handheld.
IMPORTANT If you are upgrading from another Palm OS® handheld, see
www.palm.com/support/ for important upgrade instructions before beginning your
Tungsten C handheld installation.
System requirements
Before you install and operate Palm™ Desktop software, your computer system
must meet the following minimum requirements.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 1 Welcome
4
Minimum requirements: Windows computers
The minimum requirements for Windows computers are as follows:
■IBM-compatible Pentium-class computer
■One of the following operating systems:
– Windows NT 4.0 Workstation with SP6 or later (requires a serial
cradle/cable, sold separately, and administrator rights to install Palm
Desktop software)
–Windows 98
–Windows ME
– Windows 2000 Pro (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop
software)
– Windows XP Home or Pro (requires administrator rights to install Palm
Desktop software)
■Internet Explorer 4.01 with SP2 or later
■Netscape Navigator
■50 megabytes (MB) available hard disk space
■VGA monitor or better (16 Bit or High Color, and 800 x 600 resolution
recommended)
■CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software
from www.palm.com/support/)
■Mouse
■One available USB port or serial port (serial cradle/cable sold separately)
Minimum requirements: Mac computers
The minimum requirements for Mac computers are as follows:
■Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor
■Mac OS
– Mac OS 9, version 9.1 or later
– Mac OS X, version 10.1.2 or later
■25MB available hard disk space
■12MB available RAM
■Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 x 600 or better
■CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software
from www.palm.com/support/)
■Mouse
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Finding information
5
■One available USB port or serial port (serial cradle/cable sold separately and
compatible with Mac OS 9 only)
Finding information
For installation information, see the Palm™ Montana™ Read This First that came
with your Tungsten C handheld. For comprehensive information about using your
handheld, continue reading this electronic handbook.
For support information, upgrade information, articles, and answers to questions,
see www.palm.com/support/.
For more information about using Palm Desktop software, see the following:
■The handheld tutorial, Quick Tour. To access this tutorial, tap the Quick Tour
icon from the Applications main screen.
■The electronic Palm Desktop software for the Macintosh User’s Guide. To access this
guide, open the Palm folder and then open the Documentation folder.
Double-click the file Palm Desktop.pdf.
■The online help for Palm Desktop software. To access the online help, open
Palm Desktop software and select the Help menu.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 1 Welcome
6
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
7
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
YourPalm™ Tungsten™ C handheld uses a wireless local area network (LAN) to
help you stay in touch with important information while you are away from your
desk. You can stay organized, on time, and up-to-date with daily tasks. Use your
new handheld to do the following:
■Compose and securely send and receive business or personal e-mail through
your wireless LAN.
NOTE Some companies restrict access to internal e-mail accounts when using
a handheld. Check your company or network administrator for their policy on
use of handhelds.
■Receive alerts when a new e-mail arrives or a reminder occurs. Rely on any or
all of the three alert modes: the indicator light, vibrator, or alarm sound.
■Set preferences for how you receive alarms: hearing a sound, seeing a blinking
indicator light, or feeling your handheld vibrate. Choose any combination.
■Browse or search the Internet.
■Enter your schedule in Date Book.
■Keep all your contact names, addresses, and phone numbers in Address Book.
■Prioritize and assign your tasks a due date in To Do List.
■Set alarms from World Clock and Date Book to keep yourself on schedule and
remind yourself of appointments, redial reminders, and notes.
■Synchronize your data with Palm™ Desktop software on your Windows or Mac
computer so you can work with your personal information on your computer
and maintain a copy of your information.
■Insert SD, MultiMediaCard, or SDIO expansion cards to add more software or
memory, or to back up your data.
■Beam information to another device that has an infrared (IR) port.
Locating handheld components
Take a few moments to locate the front and back panel components of your
handheld.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld
8
Locating front panel controls
IR port Uses infrared technology to transmit data to and receive data
from other Palm OS® handhelds, and to perform HotSync®
operations. See “Using elements of the handheld interface”
in Chapter 3 and see “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in
Chapter 17 for more information.
Keypad The area where you type letters and numbers, and access
special function keys. See Chapter 3 to learn how to type
characters.
Power button Turns your handheld on or off. If your handheld is turned
off, pressing the power button turns the handheld on and
returns you to the last screen you viewed.
If your handheld is turned on, pressing the power button
turns the unit off.
Screen
Keyboard area
Navigator
Power button/
Brightness control
Green indicator light
Stylus
IR port
Date
Book
Address
Book Wireless
E-mail
Application
buttons
Select button Application buttons
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Locating handheld components
9
Application buttons Activate the individual handheld applications that
correspond to the icons on the buttons: Date Book, Address
Book, E-mail, and Wireless. See “Buttons preferences” in
Chapter 18 for details on reassigning these buttons to open
any application on your handheld.
Navigator The five-way navigation button enables you to move up,
down, right, and left in pick lists and menus. You can scroll
down to view information below the viewing area, and scroll
up to view the information above the viewing area. The
navigator also has some special functions that are described
in this handbook.
Select button The navigator center Select button enables you to select
items. The Select button also has some special functions that
are described in this handbook.
Screen Displays the applications and information stored in your
handheld. It is touch-sensitive and responds to the stylus.
Green indicator light A blinking green light indicates:
■an e-mail message has arrived.
■an alarm or event notification has occurred.
A dialog box appears, describing the reason for notification.
Acknowledging the notification turns off the indicator light.
The light also indicates that the handheld is properly placed
in the cradle.
Stylus Slides in and out of the slot in the side channel of the
handheld. To use the stylus, remove it from the slot and hold
it as you would a pen or pencil. Unscrew the top of the stylus
to access the reset tool.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld
10
Locating back panel components
Universal connector Connects your handheld to the cradle, which in turn
connects to the back of your computer and through the AC
adapter to the wall current. This allows you to recharge your
handheld as well as update the information between your
handheld and computer using HotSync technology.
The universal connector also connects peripheral hardware
devices to your handheld.
Reset button Under normal use, you should not have to use the reset
button. See “Resetting your handheld” in Appendix A for
information about when and how to use the reset button.
Expansion card slot Accepts SD, MultiMediaCard, and SDIO expansion cards,
enabling you to add more memory, applications, or other
functionality. You can also back up data to an expansion
card.
NOTE Expansion cards are purchased separately.
Headset jack Connects a hands-free headset to your handheld, enabling
you to record and listen to voice memos, and listen to audio
files from the Internet.
Speaker For improved system sounds and the playing of audio files,
such as voice recording (.wav) or multimedia.
Side channel The left side channel holds the front cover, which slides in
and out.
Universal
connector
Expansion
card slot
Side
channel for
cover
Reset
button
Headset jack
Speaker
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Adding an expansion card
11
Adding an expansion card
A tiny expansion card (sold separately) increases the variety of tasks you can do
and the amount of space you have for storing software and data on your handheld.
To insert a card:
1. Insert the card in the direction shown by the icon.
2. Push the card in with your thumb. You feel the card lock and hear the system
sound.
To remove a card:
1. Push lightly against the card with your thumb.
2. When the card is released, you hear the system sound.
For complete information about working with expansion cards, see Chapter 7.
Label on card
faced down
Notched
corner
Push
Push
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld
12
Adjusting the screen brightness level
The screen brightness makes it easy for you to see the information on your
handheld. The screen brightness level can be adjusted to for ease of viewing and to
extend battery life. You can adjust the brightness level using the Adjust Brightness
dialog box.
To adjust the screen brightness level:
1. Press Function + Brightness .
2. Tap to the left or right of the slider to adjust the brightness in small increments,
or drag the slider to change the brightness in large increments.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
13
CHAPTER 3
Navigating and Entering Data
This chapter explains how to enter data into your handheld, navigate around the
interface, and use menu commands. There are several ways to enter data, to
navigate, and to use menu commands:
■Tapping
■Using the five-way navigator
■Using the handheld keyboard
■Using GraffitiTM writing
■Beaming data from another device that has an infrared port
■Entering or importing data in Palm™ Desktop software and then synchronizing
with your handheld
Tapping Like using a mouse to click elements on a computer screen, using the stylus to tap
elements on your handheld screen is the basic action that gets things done on your
handheld.
The first time you start your handheld, setup instructions appear on the screen.
These instructions include a calibration screen. Calibration aligns the internal
circuitry of your handheld with its touch-sensitive screen so that when you tap an
element on the screen, the handheld can detect exactly which task you want to
perform.
IMPORTANT Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the
handheld screen. Never use an actual pen, pencil, or other sharp object to write on
the handheld screen.
With your handheld turned on, you can tap the handheld screen to do many
operations, such as the following:
■Open applications
■Choose menu commands
■Select options in dialog boxes
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
14
Just as you can drag the mouse to select text or move objects on your computer, you
can also drag the stylus to select text. You can also use the stylus to drag the slider
of any scroll bar.
Using the navigator
When you work with most applications, the navigator on the front panel of your
handheld makes it easy for you to navigate among and select your entries. You can
use the navigator to perform tasks without the stylus using one hand.
See Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 for additional information about using the navigator
with Address Book, and Chapter 8 for additional information on using the
navigator with Date Book.
To navigate in list screens, do any of the following:
■Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll an entire screen of records.
■Press and hold Up or Down on the navigator to accelerate the scrolling.
■Press Select on the navigator to insert the selection highlight. When the selection
highlight is present, you can do the following:
– Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next records.
– Press Select again to view the selected record.
– Press Left on the navigator to remove the selection highlight.
To navigate in record screens:
1. Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current record.
2. Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next record. (This
feature is not available in Address Book.)
3. Press Select on the navigator to return to the list screen.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using the keyboard
15
To navigate in dialog boxes:
■While a pick list is open, press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight an
item, and then press Select on the navigator to select the item.
■Press Select on the navigator to close a dialog. If there’s only one button,
pressing Select activates that button. If there’s multiple buttons, Select activates
affirming buttons such as OK, Yes, or Done.
IMPORTANT Read dialog boxes carefully. Sometimes, selecting OK or Yes results in
deleting data.
Using the keyboard
You can quickly and accurately enter text or numbers on your handheld using the
keyboard. The keyboard also has special function keys that enable you to access
features. Another feature is AutoCorrect, which automatically corrects some
common misspellings when entering data from the keyboard.
Below the keyboard are application buttons and the 5-way navigator that enables
you to navigate menus and pick lists quickly without using the stylus. These
features are described in Chapter 2.
Letter and number keys: Enables you to enter letters and numbers. You
can change the key response from the Keyboard preferences screen.
See “Keyboard Preferences” in Chapter 18.
You can also access international characters using the navigator control.
See “Accessing international and special characters” later in this
chapter.
Tab/Brightness key: Adds a tab or opens the Brightness dialog box. For
more information on the Brightness dialog box, see “Adjusting the
screen brightness level” in Chapter 2.
Return/Enter key
Function
key
Delete key
Home/ShortCut
key
Tab/Brightness
key
Letter and
number keys
CAPS/Find key Space/Symbol key
Command/Menu
key
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
16
Typing capital letters
The keyboard enables you to capitalize letters in two ways:
■Use the CAPS key . Press the CAPS key twice to initiate CAPS lock.
■Press and hold the key. This feature works only when the Keyboard preference
Repeat Function is set to Capital. See “Keyboard Preferences” in Chapter 18 for
more information.
Accessing international and special characters
You can access international and special characters directly from the keyboard or
from onscreen keyboards. These character sets enable you to communicate
accurately through your memos or wireless messages.
Accessing from the keyboard
You can access international characters from the keyboard by pressing and holding
a key, and then pressing Up and Down on the navigator. The character on the
screen scrolls through a sequence of related international characters. You can scroll
though the sequence either forward or backward depending on whether you are
pressing Up or Down on the navigator.
Function key: Press to access the secondary character set. See “Using the
Function key” later in this chapter.
CAPS/Find key: Capitalizes letters or opens the Find dialog box. For
more information on capitalizing letters, see the next section “Typing
capital letters”. For information on the Find dialog box, see “Finding
information” in Chapter 4.
Space/Symbol key: Adds a space to the text or opens the onscreen
keyboards. For more information about the onscreen keyboards, see
“Accessing the onscreen keyboards” later in this chapter.
Command/Menu key: Opens the Command toolbar or Menu. The
Command bar has many functions, such as showing the signal strength
for the 802.11b radio. For information about the Command mode,
see “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in Chapter 4.
For more information about Menus, see “Using menus” in Chapter 4.
Home/ShortCut key: Opens the Application Launcher or enables you to
enter a text ShortCut. For more information on ShortCuts, see “Using
ShortCuts” later in this chapter.
Return/Enter key: Adds a manual return to the next line or enters the
data.
Delete/Backspace key: Deletes the previous character.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using the keyboard
17
NOTE This feature does not work with every key or with the Function key secondary
character set.
To access international characters from the keyboard:
1. Press and hold a key.
2. Press Up or Down on the navigator.
3. Accessing the onscreen keyboards
You can open the onscreen keyboards anytime you need to enter special characters
or numbers on your handheld.
To use the onscreen keyboard:
1. Open any application (such as Memo Pad).
2. Tap any record, or tap New.
3. Press Function + Symbol .
When a keyboard is open, you can tap to open any of the other keyboards.
After you finish, tap Done to close the onscreen keyboard and place the text in
the record.
Backspace
Carriage return
Tab
Caps lock
Caps shift
Tap here to display
alphabetic keyboard
Tap here to display
numeric keyboard Tap here to display
international keyboard
Alpha
Numeric
Symbol
Tap here to display
symbol keyboard
International
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
18
Using the Function key
The Function key enables you to access the secondary character or feature set
from each of the keys. The secondary character and feature set is labeled in blue in
the upper right on each available key.
When you press Function , a dot appears in the lower-right corner, indicating
that the next key pressed will use the secondary character or feature set. If you
press the Function twice, the dot changes to a “1” and the function feature
remains locked. Pressing Function again unlocks it.
Using special features
In addition to characters, the Function key accesses special features on some of the
keys. The following keys have special features:
Brightness key: Opens the Brightness dialog box. See “Adjusting the
screen brightness level” in Chapter 2 for more information.
Find key: Opens the Find dialog box. See “Using Find” in Chapter 4 for
more information.
Menu key: Opens the menu for the current screen. For more information,
see “Using menus” in Chapter 4 and see “Using menu commands and
the command toolbar” in Chapter 4.
Function key
Function active icon Function lock icon
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using elements of the handheld interface
19
Using ShortCuts
ShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and easy.
ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word
processors.
The handheld comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create
your own. Each ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you
might create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo. See “ShortCuts
preferences” in Chapter 18 to learn about creating your own ShortCuts.
To use a ShortCut:
1. Press Function + ShortCut .
When you press the ShortCut key, the ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion
point to show that you are in ShortCut mode.
2. Type the ShortCut characters.
Using elements of the handheld interface
Menu bar and menu
commands A set of commands that are specific to the application. Not all
applications have a menu bar.
To access the menu bar, do one of the following:
■Tap the Menu bar.
■Press Function + Menu .
To access the menu commands, do one of the following:
■Tap the menu command on the menu.
■Use Right, Left, Up, or Down on the navigator.
■Press Command Stroke + the letter. For more
information see “Using menu commands and the
command toolbar” in Chapter 4.
Scroll
bar
Previous/next
arrows
Check
box
Command
button
Pick list
Menu bar
Menu
command
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
20
Check box When a checkmark appears in a check box, the
corresponding option is active.
To insert or remove a check mark:
■If a check box is empty, tapping it inserts a checkmark.
■If a check box is selected, tapping it removes the
checkmark.
Command buttons These appear in dialog boxes and at the bottom of
application screens.
To select a command button, do one of the following:
■Tap a button to perform a command.
■Press Select on the navigator to select buttons such as OK,
Yes, or Done.
■Press Function + Enter to select the OK, Done, or
Yes buttons.
■Press Function + Backspace , to select Cancel or
No buttons.
Next/previous arrows The left and right arrows display the previous and next
record; the up and down arrows display the previous and
next page of information.
To use the arrows, do one of the following:
■Tap the arrows.
■Use Right, Left, Up, or Down on the navigator.
Pick list A list of choices that you can select from.
To use the pick list:
■Tap the arrow to display a list of choices.
■Tap an item in the list.
■Use Up or Down on the navigator to scroll through the list
and select an item.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data
21
Displaying online tips
Many of the dialog boxes that appear on your handheld contain an online Tips icon
in the upper-right corner. Online tips anticipate questions you have in a dialog box,
provide shortcuts for using the dialog box, or give you other useful information.
To display an online tip:
1. Tap the Tips icon .
2. After you review the tip, tap Done.
Using Graffiti writing to enter data
IMPORTANT Palm™ On-screen Writing must be enabled before you can use Graffiti
writing. See “On-Screen Writing preferences” in Chapter 18 for more information.
In this section you learn the procedures for creating letters, numbers, punctuation,
and symbols, as well as some Graffiti tips and tricks.
Most people find they can enter text quickly and accurately with only minutes of
practice. Graffiti writing includes any character you can type on a standard
keyboard. The Graffiti characters closely resemble the uppercase letters of the
regular alphabet, which makes Graffiti writing easy to learn.
Scroll bar A bar that enables you to scroll up and down a page.
To use the scroll bars:
■Drag the slider, or tap the top or bottom arrow, to scroll
the display one line at a time.
■To scroll to the previous page, tap the scroll bar just above
the slider. To scroll to the next page, tap the scroll bar just
below the slider.
■You can also scroll to the previous and next pages by
pressing Up and Down on the navigator.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
22
There are four basic concepts for success with Graffiti writing:
■If you draw the character shape exactly as shown in the tables later in this
chapter (like the shapes shown in the following diagram), you can achieve close
to 100 percent accuracy.
■The heavy dot on each shape shows where to begin the stroke. Certain
characters have similar shapes but different beginning and end points. Always
begin the stroke at the heavy dot. (You should not create the heavy dot; it is there
only to show you where to begin the stroke.)
■Most characters require only a single stroke. When you lift the stylus from the
screen, your handheld recognizes and displays the text character immediately.
Some single Graffiti strokes are portions of the regular alphabet equivalents.
■The screen is divided into two parts: the left side for writing the letters of the
alphabet and the right side for writing numbers.
To write Graffiti characters:
1. Tap and hold the place where you want your text to appear.
You must see a blinking cursor before you write the text.
2. Use the tables on the following pages to find the stroke shape for the letter you
want to create. For example, the stroke shown below creates the letter n.
W
r
i
te
l
etters on
the left side
Write numbers
on the right side
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data
23
Two stroke shapes are available for some letters. Choose the one that’s easiest
for you.
As you’ll see later in this chapter, you use the same shape to create both the
uppercase and lowercase version of a letter.
3. Position the stylus in the left side of the screen.
4. Start your stroke at the heavy dot, and draw the stroke shape as it appears in the
tables.
5. Lift the stylus from the screen at the end of the stroke shape.
When you lift the stylus from the screen, your handheld recognizes your stroke
immediately and prints the letter at the insertion point on the screen.
As soon as you lift the stylus from the screen, you can begin the stroke for the next
character you want to write.
NOTE You must begin the character strokes on the left side of the screen. Otherwise
your handheld does not recognize them as text characters.
To delete Graffiti characters:
■Set the insertion point to the right of the character you want to delete and make
the backspace stroke (a line from right to left).
Graffiti tips When using Graffiti writing, keep these tips in mind:
■Accuracy improves when you write large characters. Draw strokes that nearly
fill the side of the screen.
■Write at natural speed. Writing too slowly can generate recognition errors.
■Do not write on a slant. Vertical strokes should be parallel to the sides of the
screen.
■Press firmly.
Start stroke
at heavy dot
Lif
t sty
l
us
here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
24
Graffiti alphabet
The Graffiti alphabet consists of the following letters:
Letter Strokes Letter Strokes
AN
B O
CP
D Q
ER
F S
G T
HU
IV
JW
KX
LY
M Z
Space Backspace
Carriage
return Period Tap twice
or or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data
25
Capital lettersYou make capital letters with the same stroke shapes as the basic alphabet
characters. You must first “shift” to caps—just as you press the Shift key on a
keyboard—and then write the character strokes.
Graffiti writing includes a feature that automatically capitalizes the first letter
when you create a new sentence or a new record (by tapping New or a blank line).
To draw the first letter of a word as a capital letter:
■Enter the Caps Shift stroke:
TIP When Caps Shift is active, an up arrow symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the handheld screen. If you accidentally activate Caps Shift,
backspace will cancel it.
To enter only capital letters (Caps Lock):
■Enter the Caps Lock stroke:
TIP When Caps Lock is active, an underlined up arrow symbol appears in the
lower-right corner of the handheld screen. To return to lowercase, make the
Caps Shift stroke.
Graffiti numbers
Writing numbers with Graffiti writing is similar to writing letters of the alphabet,
except that you make the character strokes on the right side (numbers side) of the
Graffiti writing area.
Caps
Shift
Caps
Lock
Caps Shift
Caps Lock
Number Strokes Number Strokes
0 5
or or
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
26
Punctuation marks
Graffiti writing can create any punctuation symbol that you can enter from a
standard keyboard. When Enable Writing is enabled, the punctuation shift area at
the bottom of the screen is highlighted by a color. A single tap within the
punctuation shift area activates Punctuation mode and the next stroke you make
with the stylus creates a punctuation mark.
TIP Double-tapping within the punctuation shift area creates a period.
When Punctuation Shift is active, you can make a symbol stroke anywhere in the
Graffiti writing area (the letters or numbers side).
1 6
27
38
4 9
or
Symbol Stroke Symbol Stroke
Period
.
Dash
—
Comma
,Left Paren
(
Apostrophe
'Right Paren
)
Question
?Slash
/
Exclamation
!Dollar
$
Punctuation shift area
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Graffiti writing to enter data
27
You can also use the following additional Graffiti punctuation marks.
Symbol characters
All symbol characters begin with the symbol shift stroke in the Graffiti writing area
of your handheld.
When the Symbol Shift is active, a slanted shift symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen. The next stroke that you make creates the symbol or extended
character.
Accented characters
To create accented characters, draw the stroke that is normally used to create the
letter, followed by an accent stroke. Graffiti writing then adds the accent to the
letter.
For example, the following diagram shows the strokes required to draw an
accented e.
@ # % ^ & * < > + = |
—
\ { } [ ] ~ ` ; : " tab
Symbol
Shift
Symbol Shift
•   
,
,
,
,
,
°
,
+—X:==
cY
?
!
ƒ∅
= e
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
28
You can use the following accent strokes in combination with Graffiti letters:
Using these accent strokes, you can write the following accented letters:
àáâãäåèéêëìíîïòóôõöùúûüÿýñ
Additional non-English characters
You can write the following characters without any special punctuation or shifting:
You must write these non-English characters in the left side of the Graffiti writing
area.
Navigation strokes
In addition to character symbols, Graffiti writing includes special strokes that you
can use to navigate within text or fields in your applications.
Graffiti ShortCuts
Graffiti ShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and
easy. ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word
processors.
a a a a a a
cae
Command Stroke
Move cursor right
Move cursor left
Previous field
(Address Book only)
Next Field
(Address Book only)
Open Address Record
(Address Book only)
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Beaming data
29
Graffiti writing comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create
your own. Each ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you
might create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo. See “ShortCuts
preferences” in Chapter 18 to learn about creating your own ShortCuts.
To use a ShortCut, draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut characters.
The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in
ShortCut mode.
Your handheld includes the predefined Graffiti ShortCuts shown in the following
table.
Beaming data
Your handheld is equipped with an infrared (IR) port that is located at the top of
the handheld, behind the small dark shield. The IR port supports the IrCOMM
implementation of the standards for infrared communication established by the
Infrared Data Association (IrDA). This means that not only can you beam data to
another Palm OS® handheld that’s close by and equipped with an IR port, but you
can also beam data to a mobile phone and to any other device that supports the
IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards and that can read the type of data
you’re beaming.
You can beam the following information between devices with an IR port:
■The record currently displayed in Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Note
Pad, Palm Photos, or Memo Pad
■All records of the category currently displayed in Address Book, To Do List,
Note Pad, Palm Photos, or Memo Pad
ShortCut
Entry Shortcut
Date Stamp ds
Time stamp ts
Date / time stamp ds
Meeting me
Breakfast br
Lunch lu
Dinner di
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
30
■A special Address Book record that you designate as your business card,
containing information you want to exchange with business contacts
■An application installed in RAM memory
■An application installed on an expansion card that is seated in the card slot
TIP You can also perform HotSync® operations using the IR port.
See “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for details.
To select a business card:
1. Create an Address Book record that contains the information you want on your
business card.
2. Press Function + Menu .
3. Select “Select Business Card” on the Record menu.
4. Tap Yes.
To beam a record, business card, or category of records:
1. Locate the record, business card, or category you want to beam.
2. Press Function + Menu .
3. Select one of the following from the Record menu:
– The Beam command for an individual record
– In Address Book only: Beam Business Card
–Beam Category
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR
port of the receiving handheld.
For best results, handhelds should be between 10 centimeters (approximately
4 inches) and 1 meter (approximately 39 inches) apart, and the path between the
two handhelds must be clear of obstacles. The beaming distance to other Palm
OS handhelds may be different.
5. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue working on your handheld.
TIP You can also press and hold the Address Book application button to instantly
beam your business card to another device with an IR port.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Beaming data
31
To beam an application:
1. Press the Home .
2. Press Function + Menu .
3. Tap App, and then select Beam.
4. Select either Handheld or Card from the Beam From pick list.
5. Tap the application you want to transfer.
Some applications are copy-protected and cannot be beamed. These are listed
with a lock icon next to them.
6. Tap Beam.
7. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR
port of the receiving handheld.
8. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue working on your handheld.
To receive beamed information:
1. Turn on your handheld.
2. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting handheld to open the
Beam dialog box.
3. Select a category for the incoming information, create a new category, or leave
the information unfiled.
4. Tap Yes.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
32
Using your computer keyboard
If you have a lot of data to enter, or prefer to use the computer keyboard, you can
use Palm Desktop software or any supported personal information manager (PIM)
to enter information. You can then perform a HotSync operation to synchronize the
information on your computer with the information on your handheld. Many of
the applications that came with your handheld are also available in Palm Desktop
software and in most PIMs, so you don’t need to learn different applications. For
more information on entering data on your computer, refer to the online Help in
Palm Desktop software, the Quick Tour in Palm Desktop software (for Windows
users), and the Palm™ Desktop software Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide
on the Palm Desktop software CD-ROM.
Importing data
If you have data stored in computer applications such as spreadsheets and
databases, or if you want to import data from another handheld, you can transfer
the data to your handheld without having to enter it manually. Save the data in one
of the file formats in the following list, import it into Palm Desktop software, and
then perform a HotSync operation to transfer the data to your handheld.
Importing data from a Windows computer
Palm Desktop software can import data in the following file formats:
■Comma delimited (.csv, .txt): Address Book and Memo Pad only
■Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt): Address Book and Memo Pad only
■CSV (Lotus Organizer 2.x/97 Mapping): Address Book only
■vCal (.vcs): Date Book only
■vCard (.vcf): Address Book only
■Date Book archive (.dba)
■Address Book archive (.aba)
■To Do List archive (.tda)
■Memo Pad archive (.mpa)
Archive formats can be used only with Palm Desktop software. Use the archive file
formats to share information with other people who use a Palm OS handheld or to
create a copy of your important Palm Desktop information.
To import data from a Windows computer:
1. Open Palm Desktop software.
2. Click the application into which you want to import data.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Importing data
33
3. If you are importing records that contain a field with category names, do the
following:
Select All in the Category box.
Be sure that the same categories that appear in the imported file also exist in the
application. If the categories do not exist, create them now; otherwise, the
records are imported into the Unfiled category.
4. From the File menu, choose Import.
5. Select the file you want to import.
6. Click Open.
If you are importing a vCal or vCard file, skip to step 10. You do not have to
specify which fields correspond to the imported data.
7. To import data into the correct Palm Desktop fields, drag fields in the left
column so that they are opposite the corresponding imported fields on the right.
8. If you do not want to import a field, deselect the check box for that field.
9. Click OK.
The imported data is highlighted in the application.
10. To add the imported data to your handheld, perform a HotSync operation.
See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting
data.
Using File Link
The File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad
information to your handheld from a separate external file on your Windows
computer, such as a company phone list. You can configure the File Link feature to
check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation.
HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category in Palm Desktop software
and on your handheld.
With File Link, you can import data stored in any of the following formats:
■Comma-separated (*.csv)
■Memo Pad archive (*.mpa)
■Address Book archive (*.aba)
■Text (*.txt)
For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
34
Importing data from a Mac computer
Palm Desktop software can import data from any of the following applications
when you export the data in the appropriate file format:
■Address Book Plus (text file)
■Claris Organizer (Palm Desktop software can open these files directly).
■ClarisWorks (Save under new name as ASCII text file).
■DateBook Pro (text file)
■DayMaker (text file)
■Dynodex (text file)
■FileMaker Pro (tab separated text file)
■Meeting Maker (text file)
■Newton running OS 1.0 with Newton Connection Kit:
Names, Date Book Calendar, and Notepad (text file)
■Now Contact (text file)
■Now Up-to-Date (text file)
■QuickDex (text file)
■TouchBase Pro (text file)
Palm Desktop software can also import data in the following file formats:
■Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt)
■vCal (.vcs): Data Book only
■vCard (.vcf): Address Book only
To import data from a Mac computer:
1. Open Palm Desktop software.
2. From the File menu, choose Import.
3. Select the file you want to import.
4. Click Import.
5. If you want to change the order of the fields you’re importing, point to a field,
wait for the cursor to change to a double arrow, and then drag the field to a new
location.
6. If you do not want to import a field, click the arrow between the field names.
7. From the Fields pop-up menu, choose the appropriate field.
8. From the Delimiters pop-up menu, choose the appropriate delimiter.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Importing data
35
9. Click OK.
10. To add the imported data to your handheld, perform a HotSync operation.
See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting
data.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 3 Navigating and Entering Data
36
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
37
CHAPTER 4
Working with Applications
This chapter explains how to open and switch between applications on your
handheld, how to change application settings so they are personalized to your
work methods, and how to categorize applications so you view them in related
groups.
Opening applications
You can use the Applications Launcher to open any application installed on your
handheld or on an expansion card. You can also open Date Book, Address Book,
VersaMailTM, and Palm™ Web Browser with the application buttons on your
handheld.
In addition to providing a way for you to open applications, the Applications
Launcher displays the current time, battery level, and application category.
To open an application on your handheld:
1. Press Home .
Home key opens
Application Launcher
Address Book
Date Book
E-mail
Wireless
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
38
2. Tap the icon of the application that you want to open. If you have many
applications installed on your handheld, tap the scroll bar to see all your
applications.
Other ways to open applications
You can also open applications on your handheld in either of the following ways:
■Press and hold Select on the navigator to open the Applications Launcher. Press
Select on the navigator to insert the highlight. Press Up, Down, Right, and Left
on the navigator to highlight the icon of the application you want to open. Press
Select on the navigator to open the application.
■In the Applications Launcher, type the first letter of the application’s name. The
Applications Launcher scrolls to the first application with a name that begins
with that letter and highlights the icon. You can open the icon by pressing the
Enter key.
Opening expansion card applications
When an expansion card is properly seated in the expansion card slot, your
handheld responds based on the contents of the card and the application that is
active when you insert the card. In some cases, the application on the card opens
automatically upon insertion, or if you insert a card containing data from the
current application, the application displays the data on the card. In other cases,
the Applications Launcher switches to the card, and displays its contents, and the
pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen displays the name of the card.
To open an application on an expansion card:
■Select the icon of the application that you want to open.
Switching between applications
When working with any application, press Home or press an application
button on your handheld to switch to another application. Your handheld
automatically saves your work in the current application and displays it when you
return to that application.
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Categorizing applications
39
When you use an expansion card, your handheld creates and displays a new
category that matches the name of the expansion card. You can easily switch
between applications installed on your handheld and on the expansion card.
To switch to an expansion card:
1. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner.
TIP When the highlight in the Applications Launcher is not active, you can also
press and hold Select on the navigator to open the category pick list.
2. Select the category item that matches the name of the expansion card.
Categorizing applications
The category feature enables you to manage the number of application icons that
appear onscreen in the Applications Launcher. You can assign an application to a
category and then display a single category or all your applications.
By default, your handheld includes system-defined categories, such as All and
Unfiled, and user-defined categories, such as Games, Main, and System.
You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename and delete
the user-defined categories. In addition, you can create your own user-defined
categories. You can have a maximum of 15 user-defined categories.
When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot, the
last item in the category pick list becomes the name of the expansion card. You
cannot otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card.
To categorize an application:
1. Press Home .
2. Press Command Stroke + Y.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Category on the
App menu.
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
40
3. Tap the pick list next to each application to select a category.
TIP To create a new category, select Edit Categories from the pick list. Tap
New, enter the category name, and then press Function + Enter , or tap
OK to add the category.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
To display applications by category:
1. Press Home .
2. Do one of the following:
– Press Home repeatedly to cycle through all your categories.
– Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and select the
category you want to display.
– When the highlight in the Applications Launcher is not active, press and
hold Select on the navigator to open the category list, press Up or Down on
the navigator to highlight a category, and then press Select on the navigator
to display that category.
Changing the Applications Launcher display
By default, the Applications Launcher displays each application as an icon. As an
alternative, you can choose to show a list of applications. You can also choose to
view the same category of applications each time you open the Applications
Launcher.
To change the Applications Launcher display:
1. Press Home .
2. Press Command Stroke + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3. Tap the View By pick list and select List.
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Copying applications to or from an expansion card
41
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To open the Applications Launcher to the last opened category:
1. Press Home .
2. Press Command Stroke + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3. Tap the Remember Last Category check box to select it.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Copying applications to or from an expansion card
You can copy applications from your handheld to an expansion card, or from an
expansion card to your handheld.
To copy an application to an expansion card:
1. Press Home .
2. Press Command Stroke + C.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Copy on the App menu.
3. Select Handheld from the Copy From pick list.
4. Select the card name from the Copy To pick list.
The Copy To pick list appears only if there are multiple cards available.
5. Tap an application to copy.
6. Tap Copy.
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
42
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
You can install applications to a card that is seated in the expansion card slot
during a HotSync® operation; see “Installing files and add-on applications”
later in this chapter for details.
NOTE If you view your applications on the card using a Card Reader on your
Windows or Mac computer, the actual file names may differ from those displayed in
the Applications Launcher.
To copy an application from an expansion card:
1. Press Home .
2. Press Command Stroke + C.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Copy on the App menu.
3. Select the card name from the Copy From pick list.
4. Select Handheld from the Copy To pick list.
5. Tap an application to copy.
6. Tap Copy.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
You can also beam applications from expansion cards to your handheld.
See “Using elements of the handheld interface” in Chapter 3 for details.
Selecting copy settings
When using the copy feature, you can set the following:
■How applications are sorted and listed
■Whether to copy only the application or both the application and its data files
To select copy settings:
1. Press Home .
2. Press Command Stroke + C.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Copy on the App menu.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using menus
43
3. Tap Settings.
4. Select Name or Size from the Sort By pick list.
5. Tap the Copy Application Only check box to select it, if you want to copy only
the application files. Leave it deselected if you want to copy both the application
file and its associated data files.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
NOTE The Sort By setting is in effect each time you use the copy feature. Each time
you want to copy an application only, you must select the Copy Applications Only
check box.
Using menus
Menus on your handheld are easy to use. Once you have mastered them in one
application, you can use them the same way in all other applications.
The menus of each application are illustrated in the chapter that discusses that
application.
To open the menu bar:
1. Open an application (such as Memo Pad).
2. Do one of the following:
– Press Function + Menu .
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
44
– Tap the inverted title area at the top of the screen.
In this example, three menus are available: Record, Edit, and Options. The Record
menu is selected and contains the commands New Memo, Delete Memo, and Beam
Memo.
Choosing a menu
The menus and menu commands that are available depend on the application that
is currently open. Also, the menus and menu commands vary depending on which
part of the application you’re currently using. For example, in Memo Pad the
menus are different for the Memo list screen and the Memo record screen.
To select a menu command with the stylus:
1. Tap the menu bar for an application.
2. Tap the menu that contains the command you want to use.
3. Tap the command you want to use.
TIP After you open the menu bar, you can also press Right and Left on the navigator
to select a menu, press Down on the navigator to select the command you want to
use, and then press Select on the navigator to run the command.
Menu commands
Most menu commands have an equivalent Command stroke, which is similar to
the keyboard shortcuts used to execute commands on computers. For information
on using menu commands “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in
the next section.
Press
Function
T
ap t
h
e t
i
t
l
e area
Press
Menu
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using menu commands and the command toolbar
45
Using menu commands and the command toolbar
By using the menu commands you can access many functions directly from the
keyboard without tapping. You can also view the 802.11b radio signal strength and
access the Wi-Fi preferences screen.
Using menu commands
Most menu commands have an equivalent Command stroke, which is similar to
the keyboard shortcuts used to execute commands on computers. The command
letters appear to the right of the command names. For example, to choose Select All
in the Edit menu, press Command stroke , and type the letter s.
Using the command toolbar
The command toolbar displays the Wi-Fi icon and the 802.11b radio signal strength
indicator. The command toolbar also displays context-sensitive menu commands
for the current screen. For example, if text is selected the menu icons displayed
may be Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste. Tap an icon to select the command.
To use menu commands:
1. Press Command stroke .
The Command toolbar opens at the bottom of the screen. The Command toolbar
indicates that you are in Command mode.
2. Tap an icon or type the command letter immediately to choose the menu
command.
Command mode is active only for a short time.
Command letters
Menu commandsMenu commands
CutUndo Copy Paste Beam Delete
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
46
To access Wi-Fi status:
1. Press Command stroke .
2. Tap the Wi-Fi icon .
From the Wi-Fi Status dialog box, you can view the network connection and
signal strength. You can also tap to access Wi-Fi and VPN preferences. See “Wi-
Fi preferences” in Chapter 18 and see “VPN preferences” in Chapter 18 for
more information on preferences.
Choosing application preferences
You can set options that affect an entire application in the application’s Preferences
dialog box.
To change preferences for an application:
1. Open an application.
2. Press Command Stroke + R.
– Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on
the Options menu.
NOTE Not all applications have a Preferences command.
3. Make changes to the settings.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Enabling and disabling Palm On-screen Writing
The Edit menu also has an option Enable Writing and Disable Writing that enables
or disables Palm On-screen Writing. Enabling Palm On-screen Writing allows you
to use the full screen to write GraffitiTM characters. For a description of Graffiti
characters and Palm On-screen Writing, see “Using Graffiti writing to enter data”
in Chapter 3.
TIP On-screen writing can be turned on and off from the preferences screen. For
more information, see “On-Screen Writing preferences” in Chapter 18.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
47
To turn on or off Palm On-screen Writing writing:
■From the Edit menu, tap Enable Writing or Disable Writing.
Performing common tasks
The tasks described in this section use the term records to refer to an individual item
in any of the applications: a single Date Book event, Address Book entry, To Do List
item, Memo Pad memo, Note Pad note, or Expense item.
Creating records
You can use the following procedure to create a new record in Date Book, Address
Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, Note Pad, and Expense.
To create a record:
1. Select the application in which you want to create a record.
2. Tap New.
3. In Date Book only: Select start and end times for your appointment, and press
Function + Enter , or tap OK.
4. Enter text for the record.
5. (Optional) Tap Details to select attributes for the record. (In Note Pad the Details
command is located on the Options menu.)
6. In Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad only: Press Function
+ Enter , or tap Done.
There’s no need to save the record because your handheld saves it automatically.
Editing recordsAfter you create a record, you can change, delete, or enter new text at any time.
Two screen features tell you when your handheld is in editing mode:
■A blinking cursor
Tap here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
48
■One or more dotted edit lines
NOTE In Note Pad you can write anywhere on the screen. Therefore, you will
not see an edit line or blinking cursor unless the cursor is in the title line.
Entering text
For information on how to enter text using the keyboard on your handheld or the
keyboard attached to your computer, see Chapter 3. For information on entering
text in Note Pad, see Chapter 11.
Using the Edit menu
The Edit menu is available with any screen where you enter or edit text. In general,
commands available in the Edit menu apply to text that you select in an application.
To select text in an application:
1. Tap the beginning of the text that you want to select.
2. Drag the stylus over the text to highlight it (in yellow).
NOTE You can also double-tap to select a word, or triple-tap to select a line of
text. You can also drag across the text to select additional words, or drag down
to select a group of lines.
The following commands may appear in an Edit menu:
Undo Reverses the action of the last edit command. For example, if you
used Cut to remove text, Undo restores the text you removed. Undo
also reverses deletions you made using the backspace.
Cut Removes the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory
of your handheld. You can paste the text you cut into another area
of the current application or into a different application.
Copy Copies the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of
your handheld. You can paste the copied text into another area of
the current application or into a different application.
Edit line
Blinking cursor
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
49
Deleting records
To delete a record using the menu command:
1. Select the record you want to delete.
2. Press Command Stroke + D.
To delete a record using the Menu:
1. Select the record you want to delete.
2. Press Function + Menu .
3. Select Record, and then select one of the following Delete commands:
Date Book: Delete Event
Address Book: Delete Address
To Do List: Delete Item
Note Pad: Delete Note
Memo Pad: Delete Memo
Expense: Delete Item
A confirmation dialog box appears. If you want to save a copy of the deleted
item to an archive file in Palm™ Desktop software, be sure that the check box is
selected. If you don’t want to save a copy, tap the check box to deselect it.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
If you choose to save a copy of the selected item, your handheld transfers it to the
archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation. (The
archive option is not available in Note Pad.)
Other ways to delete records
You can also delete records in the following ways:
■Delete the text of the record.
■In Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, and Memo Pad, open the Details dialog
box for the record, tap Delete, and then press Function + Enter , or
tap OK.
Paste Inserts the cut or copied text at the selected point in a record. The
text you paste replaces any selected text. If you did not previously
cut or copy text, Paste does nothing.
Select All Selects all the text in the current record or screen. This enables you
to cut or copy all of the text and paste it elsewhere.
Keyboard Opens the onscreen keyboard. After you finish with the onscreen
keyboard, press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
50
NOTE When deleting a repeating event in Date Book, you can choose to delete
the current repeating event, current and future events, or all instances of that
event.
■In Note Pad, open the note you want to delete, and then tap Delete.
Purging records
Over time, as you use Date Book, To Do List, and Expense, you’ll accumulate
records that have outlived their usefulness. For example, events that occurred
months ago remain in the Date Book, and To Do List items that you marked as
completed remain in the list, as do Expense items.
All these outdated records take up memory on your handheld, so it’s a good idea
to remove them by using Purge. If you think Date Book or To Do List records might
prove useful later, you can purge them from your handheld and save them in an
archive file on your computer.
Purging is not available in Address Book, Note Pad, or Memo Pad; you must delete
outdated records manually from these applications.
To purge records:
1. Open the application.
2. Press Command Stroke + E.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Purge on the
Record menu.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
Date Book: Tap the pick list and select how old a record must be to be purged.
Purge deletes repeating events if the last of the series ends before the date that
you purge records.
Date Book, To Do List: If you want to save a copy of the purged records to an
archive file on your desktop, be sure that the check box is selected. If you don’t
want to save a copy, tap the check box to deselect it.
Expense: Select the category you want to purge. All data in the selected category
will be purged and there is no archive option.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK or Done.
If you chose to save a copy of the purged records, your handheld transfers them to
an archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
NOTE Purging does not happen automatically. You must select the command to
make it happen.
Categorizing records
You can categorize records in the Address Book, To Do List, Note Pad, Memo Pad,
and Expense applications so that they are grouped logically and are easy to review.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
51
When you create a record, your handheld automatically places it in the category
that is currently displayed. If the category is All, your handheld assigns it to the
Unfiled category. You can leave an entry as Unfiled or assign it to a category at any
time.
By default, your handheld includes system-defined categories, such as All and
Unfiled, and user-defined categories, such as Business and Personal.
You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename and delete
the user-defined categories. In addition, you can create your own user-defined
categories. You can have a maximum of 15 user-defined categories in each
application.
When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot, the
last item in the category pick list is the name of the expansion card. You cannot
otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card.
Address Book contains the QuickList user-defined category, in which you can store
the names, addresses, and phone numbers you might need in emergencies (doctor,
fire department, lawyer, and so on).
Expense contains two user-defined categories, New York and Paris, to show how
you might sort your expenses according to different business trips.
The illustrations in this section come from Address Book, but you can use these
procedures in all the applications in which categories are available.
To move a record into a category:
1. Select the record you want to categorize.
2. In Address Book only: Tap Edit.
3. Tap Details.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
52
4. Tap the Category pick list to display the list of available categories.
5. Select the category for the record.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
NOTE In Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad you can select the category
name in the upper-right corner of the screen to assign the item to a different
category.
To display a category of records:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the list screen.
NOTE In the Date Book Agenda view, the pick list is in the upper right of the To
Do list.
2. Select the category you want to view.
The list screen now displays only the records assigned to that category.
TIP Pressing an application button on your handheld scrolls through all the
categories of that application except for Unfiled. This feature is not available in
Date Book.
T
ap
h
ere
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
53
To define a new category:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen or list.
2. Select Edit Categories.
3. Tap New.
4. Enter the name of the new category, and then press Function + Enter , or
tap OK.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
You can assign any of your records to the new category.
To rename a category:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen or list.
2. Select Edit Categories.
ap
ere
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
54
3. Select the category that you want to rename, and then tap Rename.
4. Enter the new name for the category, and then press Function + Enter ,
or tap OK.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
TIP You can group the records in two or more categories into one category by
giving the categories the same name. For example, if you change the name of
the Personal category to Business, all records formerly in the Personal
category appear in the Business category.
Finding information
Your handheld offers several ways to find information quickly:
■All applications that reside on your handheld: Find locates any text that you
specify, always starting with the current application. However, Find does not
search through applications on expansion cards.
■Date Book, To Do List, Memo Pad: Phone Lookup displays the Address list
screen and enables you to add to a record the information that appears in this
list.
■Address Book: The Look Up line enables you to scroll immediately to a name
when you enter the first letters of that name.
■Expense: Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the
Company field. You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with
an Expense record.
Looking up Address Book records
In Address Book, you can use the Look Up line with the stylus or the navigator to
look up and quickly scroll to any of your Address Book entries.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
55
To look up an Address Book record with the stylus:
1. From the Address list screen, enter the first letter of the name you want to find.
The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter. If you write another
letter, the list scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters. For
example, writing an s scrolls to “Sands,” and writing sm scrolls further to
“Smith.” If you sort the list by company name, the Look Up feature scrolls to the
first letter of the company name.
2. Tap the record to view its contents.
To look up an Address Book record with the navigator:
1. From the Address List screen, press Right on the navigator to display the
navigator Quick Look Up line.
2. Press Up or Down on the navigator to select the first letter of the name you want
to find.
The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter.
3. Press Right on the navigator to move to the next letter box.
The Quick Look Up line displays only letters that are a possible match for that
position.
If only one match is possible for a particular position, the highlight jumps to the
next position.
Look Up line
Quick Look Up line
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
56
4. Press Up or Down on the navigator to select the next letter of the name you want
to find.
The list then scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters. For
example, selecting s scrolls to “Sands,” and selecting sm scrolls further to
“Smith.” If you sort the list by company name, the Quick Look Up feature
scrolls to the matches for the company name.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the entry you want appears in the list.
6. Press Select on the navigator to highlight the record you want.
7. Press Select on the navigator to view the contents of the selected record.
TIP If only one match is possible for the letters you selected, the contents of
the record displays automatically.
Using Find
You can use Find to locate any text that you specify, in any application that resides
on your handheld. Find does not search applications that reside on an expansion
card.
To use Find:
1. Press Function + Find .
TIP If you select text in an application before you tap Find, the selected text
automatically appears in the Find dialog box.
2. Enter the text that you want to find.
Find is not case-sensitive. For example, searching for the name “davidson” also
finds “Davidson.”
Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter. For example,
searching for “plane” finds “planet” but not “airplane.”
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Find searches for the text in all records and all notes.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
57
As your handheld searches for the text, you can tap Stop at any time. You may
want to do this if the entry you want appears before your handheld finishes the
search. To continue the search after you tap Stop, tap Find More.
4. Tap the text that you want to review.
Using Phone Lookup
Phone Lookup displays the Address list screen and enables you to add the
information that appears in this list to a record.
To use Phone Lookup:
1. Display the record in which you want to insert a phone number. The record can
be in Date Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, or any other application that takes
advantage of this feature.
2. Press Command Stroke + L.
Alternately, press Function + Menu and then select Phone Lookup on
the Options menu.
3. Begin to spell the last name of the name you want to find.
The list scrolls to the first record in the list that starts with the first letter you
enter. Continue to spell the name you’re looking for, or when you see the name,
tap it.
4. Tap Add.
The name you selected, along with the other information associated with it, is
pasted into the record you selected in step 1.
Looking up names to add to Expense records
In Expense, Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the
Company field. You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an
Expense record.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
58
To add names to an Expense record:
1. Tap the Expense record to which you want to add names.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap Who.
4. Tap Lookup.
The Attendees Lookup screen displays all the names in your Address Book that
have data in the Company field.
5. Select the name you want to add, and then tap Add.
The name appears in the Attendees screen.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more names.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Sorting lists of records
You can sort lists of records in various ways, depending on the application. Sorting
is available in applications that have list screens: Address Book, Note Pad, To Do
List, Memo Pad, and Expense.
NOTE You can also assign records to categories. See “Categorizing records” earlier
in this chapter.
Tap here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
59
To sort records in Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad:
1. Open the application to display the list screen.
2. Press Command Stroke + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on the
Options menu.
3. Do one of the following:
Address Book: Tap the setting you want.
Note Pad: Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic, Date, or Manual.
Memo Pad: Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic or Manual.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To sort the Note Pad and Memo list manually, tap and drag a note or memo to
a new location in the list.
To make the list appear in Palm Desktop software as you manually sorted it on
your handheld, open the application in Palm Desktop software and click Sort
by. Then select Order on Handheld.
To sort records in To Do List and Expense:
1. Open the application to display the list screen.
2. Tap Show.
3. Tap the Sort by pick list and select an option.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Address Book
Note Pad
Memo Pad
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
60
Attaching notes
In Address Book, Date Book, To Do List, and Expense, you can attach a note to a
record. A note can be up to several thousand characters long. For example, for an
appointment in Date Book, you can attach a note with directions to the location.
To attach a note to a record:
1. Display the entry to which you want to add a note.
To display an entry, tap it or press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight it,
and then press Select on the navigator.
2. In Address Book only: Tap Edit.
3. Tap Details.
4. Tap Note.
5. Enter your note.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
A small note icon appears at the right side of any item that has a note.
To review or edit a note:
■Tap the Note icon .
TIP In Date Book, you can also select the event that contains the note, press Select
on the navigator to open the note, and then press Select on the navigator again to
close the note.
To delete a note:
1. Tap the Note icon .
2. Tap Delete.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Yes.
Note icon
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing common tasks
61
Choosing fontsIn many applications, you can change the font style to make text easier to read. You
can choose small, small bold, large, or large bold fonts in each application that
enables you to change font style.
To change the font style:
1. Open an application.
2. Press Command Stroke + F.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Font on the
Options menu.
3. Tap the font style you want to use.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Small font
Large font
Small bold font
Large bold font
Tap here for
small font
Tap here for small bold font
Tap here for large bold font
Tap here for large font
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
62
Receiving alerts
You can receive alerts on your handheld and in Palm Desktop software.
Receiving alerts on your handheld
When you use certain application settings, your handheld can alert you to any of
the following:
■An appointment set in Date Book
■A note created in Note Pad
■An alarm set in World Clock
When an alert occurs, your handheld displays a reminder message. If you tap
Snooze in response to an alert message, your handheld reminds you of the item
again in five minutes. The Reminder screen displays alerts that await attention.
To respond to alerts, do one of the following:
■Select an item’s check box to clear the item.
■Tap an item (either the icon or the text description) to open the application
where the alarm was set. The application opens to the entry associated with the
alarm.
■Press Function + Enter , or tap Done to close the reminder list and return
to the current screen. An attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the
screen; tap it to view the alert list again.
■Tap Snooze to see the list again in five minutes.
If you tap Done or Snooze and view the reminder list later, the current time is
displayed in the Reminder bar and the original alert time is displayed with each
list item.
■Tap Clear All to dismiss all alerts in the list.
Receiving alerts from Palm Desktop software
You can also set an option to receive Date Book event alerts from Palm Desktop
software. The feature is disabled by default, so you must enable it within Palm
Desktop software.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications
63
To enable an event alert from Palm Desktop software:
1. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon.
2. From the Tools menu, select Options, and then select Alarms.
3. Set Alarm Configuration options, either Always Available or Available only
when the Palm Desktop is running.
4. (Optional) To hear an alert sound as well as receive an alert message, select the
check box Play audible notification with alarm dialog.
5. Click OK.
Hiding or masking private records
You can use the Security preferences to set a password and select whether to mask
your private records or hide them completely. See “Security preferences” in
Chapter 18 for details.
Installing and removing applications
This section explains how to install and remove applications and other files on
your handheld or on an expansion card, and how to remove Palm Desktop
software from your computer.
Installing files and add-on applications
Your handheld comes with applications installed and ready to use, but you can
also install additional applications, such as games and other software, on your
handheld or on a card that is seated in the expansion card slot. Applications or
games that you install on your handheld reside in RAM memory, and you can
delete them at any time. You can also install other files such as photos or MP3 audio
files. Both applications and files are easy to install during a HotSync operation.
There are a variety of third-party applications available for your handheld. To
learn more about these applications, go to the web site: www.palm.com.
NOTE Palm works with developers of third-party add-on applications to ensure the
compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld. Some third-party
applications, however, may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new
Palm handheld.
If you suspect that a third-party application is adversely affecting the operation of
your handheld, contact the developer of the application. In addition, Palm, Inc. has
information about some applications' compatibility with your handheld. To find this
information, do one of the following:
■Go to www.palm.com/support/. Click the link for information about your
handheld, and then find the information on compatibility of third-party
applications.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
64
■Read the readme file for your handheld. After you install Palm Desktop software
on your computer, open the Palm folder. The readme file is located in the Helpnote
folder.
Installing applications and files on a Windows computer
Palm Quick Install makes it easy to install applications and files during a HotSync
operation. Depending on the file type, Palm Quick Install determines whether to
install the files on your handheld or on an expansion card.
With Palm Quick Install you can install the following types of files:
■Palm files types, including PRC, PDB, PQA, PNC, and SCP
■ZIP files
■Image files, including BMP, JPEG, TIFF, and GIF
■Audio files, including MP3, WAV, AAC, and RMJ
■Video files, including MP4, MPG, and AVI
You can use any of the following methods to install applications and files with
Palm Quick Install:
■Drag and drop files onto the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.
■Drag and drop files onto the Palm Quick Install window.
■Use the commands or buttons in the Palm Quick Install window.
The procedures that follow explain how to install applications and files using each
of these methods.
To drag and drop applications or files onto the Palm Quick Install icon:
1. Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your
computer.
2. From My Computer or Windows Explorer, select the file(s) or folder that you
want to install.
3. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder on to the Palm Quick Install icon on the
Windows desktop.
Palm Quick Install displays a status dialog box that shows whether the files will
be installed on your handheld or an expansion card.
4. Click OK.
If the selected files are compatible, the files are placed in the Handheld or
Expansion Card queue based on the file extension.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications
65
If the files are incompatible, a message asks if you want to add the files to the
queue. Click Yes to add the files to the expansion card queue.
5. Perform a HotSync operation to install the files.
To drag and drop applications or files onto the Palm Quick Install window:
1. Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your
computer.
2. Double click the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.
3. From My Computer or Windows Explorer, select the file(s) or folder that you
want to install.
4. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder on to the handheld or expansion card queue.
If you drag an incompatible file to the handheld queue, a status dialog box asks
if you want to install the file on the expansion card. Click Yes to place the file in
the queue.
5. Perform a HotSync operation to install the files.
Handheld queue
Expansion card queue
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
66
To install add-on software on your handheld using a Windows computer:
1. Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your
computer.
2. Double click the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.
3. In the User drop-down list, select the name that corresponds to your handheld.
4. Click Add.
TIP To install a folder, open the File menu and select Add Folder.
5. Select the application(s) or file(s) that you want to install.
6. Click OK.
If you selected any files that are incompatible with the handheld, a status dialog
box asks if you want to install the file on the expansion card. Click Yes to place
the file in the queue.
7. If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing, drag
the files to move applications between the handheld and expansion card queue.
8. Perform a HotSync operation to install the selected application(s).
See “Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for details.
NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were
not installed. This can happen if the file type was not recognized during the
HotSync operation. Expansion cards may hold applications that use files other
than the Palm™ application files. For your handheld to recognize such a file,
you must first launch the associated application at least once.
User
drop-down
list
Add button
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications
67
Palm Quick Install Tips
■Audio and video files are automatically placed in the expansion card queue.
■When you drag and drop a folder that has subfolders, Palm Quick Install only
looks at the files one folder below the selected folder.
■To install files in a different location, start Palm Quick Install and drag the files
to a different queue.
■You can also access the Palm Quick Install window by clicking Install on the
Palm Desktop launch bar.
Installing applications and files on a Mac computer
The Install Tool makes it easy to install applications and files during a HotSync
operation. You can specify whether to install the files on your handheld or on an
expansion card.
You can use the Install Tool to install the following types of files:
■Palm files types, including PRC, PDB, PQA, PNC, and SCP
■Image files, including BMP, JPEG, TIFF, and GIF
■Audio files, including MP3, Real Audio RA8, and Gecko
■Video files
To install add-on software on your handheld using a Mac computer:
1. On your Mac computer, copy or download the application you want to install
into the Add-on folder in your Palm folder.
2. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
3. From the HotSync menu, select Install Handheld Files.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
68
4. From the User pop-up menu, select the name that corresponds to your
handheld.
5. Click Add To List.
If the file you want to install is not listed in the dialog box, go to the folder to
which you copied the file. Most handheld application files have the extension
PRC, PDB, PQA, or SCP.
6. Select the application(s) you want to install.
7. Click Add File to add the selected application to the Install Handheld Files list.
TIP You can also drag files or folders of files to the list in the Install Handheld
Files dialog box. The files are copied to the Files To Install folder.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications
69
8. If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing, click
Change Destination in the Install Handheld Files window, and then use the
arrows to move applications between your handheld and an expansion card.
9. Click OK to close the Change Destination window.
10. Close the Install Handheld Files window.
11. Perform a HotSync operation to install the selected application(s) on your
handheld. See “Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for
details.
NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were
not installed. This can happen if the file type was not recognized during the
HotSync operation. Expansion cards may hold applications that use files other
than the Palm application files. For your handheld to recognize such a file, you
must first launch the associated application at least once.
Removing applications
If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer need an application you
installed, you can remove applications from your handheld or from an expansion
card. From your handheld, you can remove only add-on applications, patches, and
extensions that you install; you cannot remove the applications that reside in the
ROM portion of your handheld.
To remove an add-on application:
1. Tap the Home icon .
2. Tap the Menu icon .
3. Select Delete on the App menu.
4. Tap the Delete From pick list and select either Handheld or Card. If you want
to delete applications from a card, the card must be seated in the expansion
card slot.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
70
5. Tap the application that you want to remove.
6. Tap Delete.
7. Tap Yes.
8. Tap Done.
Removing Palm Desktop software
If you no longer want to use Palm Desktop software, you can remove it from your
computer.
This process removes only the application files. The data in your Users folder
remains untouched.
NOTE You may need to modify the steps shown here to accommodate the version
of the operating system installed on your computer.
To remove Palm Desktop software from a Windows computer:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3. Click the Change or Remove Programs button.
4. Select Palm Desktop.
5. Click Change/Remove.
This process removes only the application files. The data in your Users folder
remains untouched.
6. Click Yes in the Confirm File Deletion box.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Close.
NOTE If you want to synchronize data with another personal information manager
(PIM) you need to install the HotSync Manager from the Desktop Software CD-ROM.
During the installation select the Custom option and then choose to install only
HotSync Manager.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Installing and removing applications
71
To remove Palm Desktop software from a Mac computer:
1. Insert the Desktop Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive on your computer.
2. Double-click the Desktop Software CD-ROM icon on your desktop.
3. Double-click the Palm Desktop Installer icon.
4. From the Easy Install screen, select Uninstall from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the software you want to remove.
6. Click Uninstall.
7. Select the folder that contains your Palm Desktop software files.
8. Click Remove.
9. Restart your computer.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 4 Working with Applications
72
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
73
CHAPTER 5
Using Address Book
Address Book enables you to keep names, addresses, phone numbers, and
other information about your personal or business contacts. Use Address
Book to do the following:
■Quickly look up or enter names, addresses, phone numbers, and other
information.
■Enter up to five phone numbers (home, work, fax, mobile, and so on) or e-mail
addresses for each name.
■Define which phone number appears in the Address list for each Address Book
entry.
■Attach a note to each Address Book entry, in which you can enter additional
information about the entry.
■Assign Address Book entries to categories so that you can organize and view
them in logical groups.
■Create your own digital business card that you can beam using e-mail to other
devices with an infrared (IR) port.
NOTE You can encrypt your Address Book entries. For more information,
see “Encrypting your data” in Chapter 18.
To open Address Book:
■Press the Address Book application button on the front panel of your
handheld. Address Book opens to display the list of all your records.
Address Book button
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 5 Using Address Book
74
TIP Press the Address Book application button repeatedly to cycle through the
categories in which you have records. You can also press and hold the Address Book
application button to instantly beam your business card to another device with an
IR port. The receiving device must also have an application that can read the Address
Book data.
Creating an Address Book entry
A record in Address Book is called an entry. You can create entries on your
handheld, or you can use Palm™ Desktop software to create entries on your
computer and then transfer the entries to your handheld with your next HotSync®
operation.
Palm Desktop software also has data import capabilities so that you can load
database files into Address Book on your handheld.
See “Importing data” in Chapter 3 and Palm Desktop online Help for more
information.
To create a new Address Book entry:
1. Press the Address Book button on the front of your handheld to display the
Address list.
2. Tap New.
3. Enter the last name of the person you want to add to your Address Book.
The handheld automatically capitalizes the first letter of each field (except
numeric and e-mail fields). You do not have to use the CAPS key to capitalize
the first letter of the name.
4. Tap the First Name field.
TIP Pressing Tab moves the cursor to the next field.
5. Enter the first name of the person in the First Name field.
6. Enter the other information that you want to include in this entry.
Tap New
Cursor
at Last
name
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Selecting types of phone numbers
75
As you enter letters in the Title, Company, City, and State fields, text appears for
the first logical match that exists in your Address Book. As you enter more
letters, a closer match appears. For example, you may already have Sacramento
and San Francisco in your Address Book. As you enter S, Sacramento appears,
and as you continue entering a and n San Francisco replaces Sacramento. As
soon as the word you want appears, tap the next field to accept the word.
7. Tap the scroll arrows or press Up/Down on the navigator to move to the next
page of information.
8. After you finish entering information, Press Function + Enter , or tap
Done.
TIP To create an entry that always appears at the top of the Address list, begin the
Last name or Company field with a symbol, as in *If Found Call*. This entry can
contain contact information in case you lose your handheld.
Selecting types of phone numbers
You can select the types of phone numbers or e-mail addresses that you associate
with an Address Book entry. Any changes you make apply only to the current
entry.
To select other types of phone numbers in an entry:
1. Tap the entry that you want to change.
2. Tap Edit.
Tap Done
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 5 Using Address Book
76
3. Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change.
4. Select a new label.
Changing Address Entry details
The Address Entry Details dialog box provides a variety of options that you can
associate with an entry.
To open the Address Entry Details dialog box:
1. Tap the entry whose details you want to change.
2. Tap Edit.
3. Tap Details.
4. Select any of the following settings:
Tap
triangle
Show in List Select which type of phone or other information appears in
the Address list screen. Your options are Work, Home, Fax,
Other, E-mail, Main, Pager, and Mobile. The identifying
letters W, H, F, O, M, or P appear next to the record in the
Address list, depending on which information is displayed.
If you select E-mail, no identifying letter is displayed.
Category Assign the entry to a category.
Private Hide this entry when Security is turned on.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Address Book menus
77
Address Book menus
Address Book menus are shown here for your reference, and Address Book
features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands.
The Record and Options menus may differ, depending on whether you’re
displaying the Address list screen or the Address view screen.
Record menus
Duplicate
Address Makes a copy of the current record and displays the copy in
Address Edit so you can make changes to the copied record. The
copy has the same category and attached notes as the original
record.
Connect Opens the Quick Connect dialog box where you can select which
application to use to make the connection.
Send Category Opens a dialog box where you can select how to send all records
in the selected category to another device. The options available
depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Send Address Opens a dialog box where you can select how to send the
selected entry to another device. The options available depend
on the software installed on your handheld.
Address list
Address view
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 5 Using Address Book
78
Options menus
Preferences
Remember last category: Determines how Address Book
appears when you return to it from another application. If
you select this check box, Address Book shows the last
category you selected. If you clear it, Address Book
displays the All category.
Rename Custom
Fields Fields that appear at the end of the Address Edit screen.
Rename them to identify the kind of information you enter
in them. The names you give the custom fields appear in
all entries.
About Address
Book Shows version information for Address Book.
Address list Address view
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
79
CHAPTER 6
Using Calculator
Calculator enables you to perform basic calculations. Use Calculator to do
the following:
■Perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root
operations.
■Store and retrieve values.
■Display the last series of calculations, which is useful for confirming a series of
“chain” calculations.
To open Calculator:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the Calculator icon .
Performing calculations
The Calculator includes several buttons to help you perform calculations.
Clears the entire calculation so that you can begin a fresh calculation.
Clears the last number you entered. If you make a mistake while
entering a number in the middle of a calculation, you can use this
button to reenter the number without starting the calculation over.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 6 Using Calculator
80
Viewing recent calculations
The Recent Calculations command enables you to review the last series of
calculations and is particularly useful for confirming a series of “chain”
calculations.
To display recent calculations:
1. Press Command Stroke + l.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Recent
Calculations on the Options menu.
2. After you finish reviewing the calculations, press Function + Enter , or
tap OK.
Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value.
If you want to enter a negative number, enter the number first and
then press the +/- button.
Places the current number in memory. Each new number you enter
with the M+ button is added to the total already stored in memory. The
number that you add can be either a calculated value or any number
you enter by pressing the number buttons. Pressing this button has
no effect on the current calculation (or series of calculations); it
merely places the value into memory until it is recalled.
Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it into the current
calculation.
Clears any value that is stored in the Calculator memory.
Calculates the square root of a number. Enter the number, and then
tap the square root button.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Calculator menus
81
Using Calculator menus
The Calculator menu shown here is for your reference, and the Calculator feature
described here is not explained elsewhere in this book.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Options menu
About Calculator Shows version information for Calculator.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 6 Using Calculator
82
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
83
CHAPTER 7
Using Card Info
Card Info enables you to review general information about an expansion
card. Use Card Info to do the following:
■Review card contents.
■Rename a card.
■Format a card.
Reviewing Card Information
You can view the card name, type, available storage space, and a summary of its
contents.
To review Card Information:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the Card Info icon .
3. Review Card name, Type, and Size.
4. Review card contents summarized by directory.
Review card information
Review summarized
card contents
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 7 Using Card Info
84
Renaming a card
Renaming a card enables you to give an easy to recognize name to the card.
To rename a card:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the Card Info icon .
3. Press Command Stroke + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Rename Card on
the Card menu.
4. Enter the new name for the card.
5. Tap Rename.
Formatting a card
Formatting a card destroys all its data and prepares it to accept new applications
and data.
To format a card:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the Card Info icon .
3. Press Command Stroke + F.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Format Card on
the Card menu.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Managing an expansion card
85
Managing an expansion card
■When writing data to an expansion card, wait for your handheld to complete
the operation before removing the card from the slot. This prevents data
corruption or accidental damage to the expansion card.
■You can install applications to an expansion card after performing an initial
HotSync® operation. See “Installing files and add-on applications” in Chapter 4
for information. For optimal performance, we recommend that you do not
install more than fifty applications to a single expansion card.
■When your handheld’s battery level becomes very low, access to the expansion
card may be disabled to protect your data. If this occurs, recharge your
handheld as soon as possible.
Using the Card Info menu
The Card Info menu is shown here for your reference, and the Card Info features
that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Help Provides help text.
About Card Info Shows version information for Card Info.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 7 Using Card Info
86
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
87
CHAPTER 8
Using Date Book
Date Book enables you to quickly and easily schedule appointments or any
kind of activity associated with a time and date. Use Date Book to do the
following:
■Enter a description of your appointment and assign it to a specific time and
date.
■Display a chart of your appointments for an entire week. The Week view makes
it easy to spot available times and potential scheduling overlaps or conflicts.
■Display a monthly calendar to quickly spot days where you have morning,
lunch, or afternoon appointments.
■Display an agenda showing appointments, untimed events, and your To Do
items for the day.
■Set an alarm to notify you of the scheduled activity.
■Create reminders for events that are based on a particular date, rather than time
of day. Birthdays and anniversaries are easy to track with your handheld.
■Attach notes to individual events for a description or clarification of the entry
in your Date Book.
NOTE You can encrypt your Date Book records. For more information,
see “Encrypting your data” in Chapter 18.
To open Date Book:
■Press the Date Book application button on the front panel of your handheld.
Date Book opens to today’s schedule.
TIP Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to cycle through the
Day, Week, Month, and Agenda views.
Date Book button
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
88
When you open Date Book, the screen shows the current date and a list of times for
a normal business day.
Scheduling an event
A record in Date Book is called an “event.” An event can be any kind of activity
that you associate with a day. You can enter a new event on any of the available
time lines.
When you schedule an event, its description appears on the time line, and its
duration is automatically set to one hour. You can easily change the start time and
duration for any event.
It’s possible to schedule events that overlap, but Date Book makes it easy to find
such conflicts. See “Spotting event conflicts” later in this chapter.
You can also schedule events in your Date Book that occur on a particular date but
have no specific start or end times, such as birthdays, holidays, and anniversaries.
These are referred to as “untimed events.” Untimed events appear at the top of the
list of times, marked with a diamond. You can have more than one untimed event
on a particular date.
You can also schedule a repeating event, such as a weekly meeting, and continuous
events, such as a three-day conference or a vacation.
To schedule an event for the current day:
1. Tap the time line that corresponds to the beginning of the event.
2. Enter a description of the event. You can enter up to 255 characters.
Tap a
time line
Enter event
Time bar
shows
duration
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Scheduling an event
89
3. If the event is one hour long, skip to step 5. If the event is longer or shorter than
an hour, tap the time of the event to open the Set Time dialog box.
4. Do one of the following:
– Tap the time columns on the right side of the Set Time dialog to set the Start
Time, and then tap the End Time box and tap the time columns to set the End
Time.
– Tap All Day to automatically insert the start and end time of the event as
defined in your Date Book preferences.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
6. Tap a blank area of the screen to deselect the event. A vertical line appears next
to the time, indicating the duration of the event.
If an event has the same start and end time, the time is displayed only once.
Tap the
time of an
event
S
tart
T
ime
highlighted
T
ap to scro
ll
to
earlier hours
Tap to scroll to
later hours
Tap to change
hours
Tap to change
minutes
Tap to automatically
fill the start and end
times
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
90
To schedule an event for another day:
1. Select the date you want for the event by doing one of the following:
– Tap the day of the week that you want in the date bar at the top of the screen.
If necessary, tap the Previous week or Next week scroll arrows to move to
another week.
– Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous day.
– Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current day.
– Tap Go To at the bottom of the screen to open the Go to Date dialog box.
Select a date by tapping a year, month, and day in the calendar.
2. After you locate the date, follow the steps for scheduling an event for the
current day.
To schedule an untimed event:
1. Select the date that you want for the event.
2. Tap New.
3. Tap No Time, so that no start or end times are defined for the new event.
P
rev
i
ous
week
N
ext
week
Tap to select a day of
the current week
P
rev
i
ous year
N
ext year
Tap to select
current date
Tap to select a
month
Tap to select a
day
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Selecting an event
91
4. Enter a description of the event.
5. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the untimed event.
If you create an event and decide later that there is no particular start or end time,
you can easily change it to an untimed event. Tap the time of the event in the Date
Book screen, tap No Time, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Selecting an event
After you create an event, you can select an event to view its contents, reschedule
it, make it a repeating event, and add alarms or notes.
To select an event:
1. Go to the day on which the event is scheduled.
2. Tap the event.
TIP You can also press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight on the
next event in the current day or on the first event of another day. To scroll
through the events in the selected day, press Up and Down on the navigator.
Rescheduling an event
You can easily make changes to your schedule with your handheld.
To reschedule an event:
1. Select the event you want to reschedule.
2. Tap Details.
3. To change the time, tap the Time box and select a new time.
4. To change the date, tap the Date box and select a new date.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
No time
selected
New
untimed
event
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
92
Setting an alarm for an event
The Alarm setting enables you to set an alarm for events in your Date Book. You
can set an alarm to notify you minutes, hours, or days before an event. The default
Alarm setting is five minutes before the time of the event, but you can change the
Alarm to any number of minutes, hours, or days.
When you set an alarm, this icon appears to the far right of the event with the
alarm. When the alarm occurs, a reminder message also appears onscreen.
To set an alarm for an event:
1. Select the event to which you want to assign an alarm.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Alarm check box to select it.
The default setting, 5 Minutes, appears.
4. Tap the pick list to select Minutes, Hours, or Days.
5. Select the 5 and enter any number from 0 to 99 (inclusive) as the number of time
units.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
7. When the reminder message appears on screen, do one of the following:
– Press Function + Enter , or tap OK, to permanently dismiss the
reminder and return to the current screen.
– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. The
reminder message appears again five minutes after you tap Snooze, and
meanwhile an attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen
to remind you of the pending alarm.
Tap here to
select unit of time
Enter number of
time units here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Scheduling repeating or continuous events
93
– Tap Go To to open Date Book. Date Book opens and displays the event
associated with the alarm.
Alarm for untimed events: You can set a silent alarm for an untimed event. In this
case, the alarm triggers at the specified period of minutes, hours, or days before
midnight (beginning) of the day of the untimed event. When the alarm triggers, the
reminder list displays the alarm message until you clear it. See “Receiving alerts”
in Chapter 4 for details.
For example, you might set an alarm for an untimed event that occurs on
February 4. If the alarm is set for five minutes, the reminder message appears at
11:55 PM on the night of February 3. The reminder remains in the reminder list
until you turn on your handheld and dismiss it.
Scheduling repeating or continuous events
The Repeat function lets you schedule events that recur at regular intervals or
extend over a period of consecutive days.
A birthday is a good example of an event that repeats annually. Another example
is a weekly guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same time
of day.
A business trip or a vacation is an example of a continuous event.
To schedule a repeating or continuous event:
1. Select the event.
2. Tap Details.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
94
3. Tap the Repeat box to open the Change Repeat dialog box.
4. Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year to set how often the event repeats.
For a continuous event, tap Day.
5. On the Every line, enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the
event to repeat.
For example, if you select Month and enter the number 2, the event repeats
every other month.
6. To specify an end date for the repeating or continuous event, tap the End on
pick list and tap Choose Date. Use the date picker to select an end date.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
After you schedule a repeating or continuous event, the Repeat icon appears to
the far right of the event.
Tap the
Repeat
box
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Scheduling repeating or continuous events
95
Changing repeating or continuous events
When you make changes to a repeating or continuous event, such as deleting or
adding notes or changing the time of an event, you can decide which of the events
you want to change—all events in the series, just the current event, or the current
and future events.
To delete repeating events:
1. Select the record you want to delete.
2. Press Function + Menu .
3. Select Record, and then select Delete Event.
4. Do one of the following:
– Tap Current to delete only the current event item.
– Tap Future to delete the current and all future event items and reset the end
date of the repeating event to the last shown date.
– Tap All to delete all occurrences of the repeating event.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Considerations for repeating or continuous events
Keep the following points in mind:
■If you change the start date of a repeating event, your handheld calculates the
number of days you moved the event. Your handheld then automatically
changes the end date to maintain the duration of the repeating event.
■If you change the repeat interval (e.g., daily to weekly) of a repeating event, past
occurrences (prior to the day on which you change the setting) are not changed,
and your handheld creates a new repeating event.
■If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., from January
14th to January 15th) and apply the change to all occurrences, the new date
becomes the start date of the repeating event. Your handheld adjusts the end
date to maintain the duration of the event. If you apply the change to current
and future occurrences, past occurrences are not changed.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
96
■If you change other repeat settings (e.g., time, alarm, private) of a repeating
event and apply the change to all occurrences, your handheld creates a new
event. The start date of this new event is the day on which the setting is
changed.
■If you apply a change to a single occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., time), that
occurrence no longer shows the Repeat icon .
Changing the Date Book view
In addition to displaying the time list for a specific day, you can also display a
whole week, a month, an agenda, and the current time.
To cycle through Day, Week, Month, and Agenda views:
■Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to display the next view.
■Tap the appropriate view icon in the lower-left corner of Date Book.
Working in Week view
Week view shows the calendar of your events for an entire week. This view lets you
quickly review your appointments and available time slots. In addition, the
graphical display helps you spot overlaps and conflicts in your schedule.
To display the Week view:
1. Tap the Week view icon.
2. Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a week at a time, or
tap on a column to display details of an event.
The Week view also shows untimed events and events that are before and after
the range of times shown. Untimed repeating events appear in green.
Week view
P
rev
i
ous
week Next week
Tap for that day
Bar indicates earlier event
Bar indicates later event
Diamond indicates untimed event
Dashed line indicates repeating event
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Changing the Date Book view
97
3. Tap an event to show a description of the event.
Tips for using Week view
Keep the following points in mind:
■To reschedule an event, tap and drag the event to a different time or day.
■Tap a blank time on any day to move to that day and have the time selected for
a new event.
■Tap any day or date that appears at the top of the Week view to move directly
to that day without selecting an event.
■Press Right and Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous week.
■Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, and then press Right and
Left to select a day within the selected week. To view the events on the selected
day, press Select on the navigator again.
■The Week view shows the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time in
the Date Book Preferences settings. If you have an event before or after this time
span, a bar appears at the top or bottom of that day’s column. Use the onscreen
scroll arrows to scroll to the event, or press Up and Down on the navigator to
scroll to earlier and later time slots within the selected week.
Working in Month view
The Month view screen shows which days have events scheduled. Dots and lines
in the Month view indicate events, repeating events, and untimed events.
Event details
Tap to show event details
Previous/next month
Dashes on right side indicate events
Dashed line below date indicates continuous event
Diamond below date indicates untimed event
Month view button
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
98
You can control the dots and lines that appear in the Month view. See “Display
Options” later in this chapter.
Tips for using Month view
Keep the following points in mind:
■Tap a day in the Month view to display that day in the Day view.
■Tap the scroll arrows in the upper-right corner, or press Left and Right on the
navigator, to move forward or backward a month.
■Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, and then press Left and
Right on the navigator to scroll to a specific day. Press Select on the navigator to
display that day in the Day view.
■Untimed repeating events appear in green.
Working in Agenda view
The Agenda view shows you your untimed events, appointments, and To Do items
in one screen. When you tap an untimed event or appointment in the Agenda view,
the Day view appears so you can see more detailed information about the event.
You can tap the check box next to a To Do item to mark it as completed. When you
tap on a To Do item, your To Do list appears.
NOTE The To Do items that appear and how you can change them depends on the
settings in your To Do preferences. See “Setting To Do Preferences” in Chapter 13 for
more information.
To display the Agenda view:
1. Tap the Agenda view icon.
2. Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a day at a time, or to
display more events and To Do items.
TIP You can also press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll through the
events on the selected day, or press Right and Left on the navigator to scroll to
the next or previous day.
Agenda view
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Spotting event conflicts
99
NOTE You can also change the category of To Do items shown. Tap on the pick
list to choose another category. See Chapter 13 for more information on
working with To Do items.
Spotting event conflicts
With the ability to define specific start and end times for any event, it’s possible to
schedule events that overlap (an event that starts before a previous event finishes).
An event conflict (time overlap) appears in the Week View as overlapping bars.
The first event created appears as a gray bar, and any subsequent conflicting events
appear as a single red bar. The Day View displays overlapping red brackets to the
left of the conflicting times. The Month View displays conflicting appointments
in red.
Date Book menus, preferences, and display options
Date Book menus are shown here for your reference, and Date Book features that
are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Event
conflicts
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
100
Record menu
Options menu
Display Options
Allows you to change Date Book’s appearance and which events are displayed.
Send Event Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send the selected event to another device. The options available
depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Show Time Bars Activates the time bars that appear in the Day view. The
time bars show the duration of an event and illustrate
event conflicts.
Compress Day view Controls how times appear in the Day view. When
Compress Day view is off, all time slots are displayed.
When it is on, start and end times are displayed for each
event, but blank time slots toward the bottom of the screen
disappear to minimize scrolling.
Month view settings These check boxes apply to the Month view of the Date
Book. You can deactivate any or all of these settings to hide
Timed, Untimed, or Daily Repeating events in the Month
view only.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Date Book menus, preferences, and display options
101
Preferences
About Date Book
Shows version information for Date Book.
Start/End Time Defines the start and end times for Date Book screens. If the
time slots you select do not fit on one screen, you can tap the
scroll arrows to scroll up and down.
Alarm Preset Automatically sets an alarm for each new event. The silent
alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours
before midnight at the end of the date of the event.
Alarm Sound Sets the tone of the alarm.
Remind Me Defines how many times the alarm occurs after the initial
occurrence. The choices are Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and
10 Times.
Play Every Defines how often the alarm sounds. The choices are Minute,
5 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 minutes.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 8 Using Date Book
102
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
103
CHAPTER 9
Using Expense
Expense enables you to keep track of your expenses and then transfer the
information to a spreadsheet on your computer. In Expense you can do the
following:
■Record dates, types of expenses, amount spent, payment method, and other
details associated with any money that you spend.
■Assign expense items to categories so that you can organize and view them in
logical groups.
■Keep track of vendors (companies) and people involved with each expense.
■Log miles traveled for a particular date or expense category.
■Sort your expenses by date or expense type.
■Send or export your expense information to popular computer applications,
such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word, using Palm™ Desktop software and
HotSync® technology on a Windows computer.
IMPORTANT To access Expense, you must first perform a HotSync operation with
your handheld. Expense is automatically loaded onto your handheld during the first
HotSync operation.
To open Expense:
1. Press Home .
2. Select the Expense icon .
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense
104
Adding expense items
A record in Expense is called an item. You can sort your Expense items into
categories or add other information that you want to associate with the item.
1. Tap New.
2. Enter the amount of the expense.
3. Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type from the list.
As soon as you select an expense type, your handheld saves your entry. If you
do not select an expense type, it does not save the entry.
TIP Another quick way to create a new Expense item is to make sure that no
Expense item is selected in the Expense list, type the first letter(s) of the
expense type, and then type the numerical amount of the Expense item. This
technique takes advantage of the automatic fill feature. See “Options menu”
later in this chapter for details.
Tap New
Cursor of
new item
Tap here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Adding expense items
105
Changing the date of an Expense item
Initially, Expense items appear with the date on which you enter them. You can
change the date associated with any Expense item.
To change the date of an Expense item:
1. Tap the Expense item you want to change.
2. Tap the date of the selected item.
3. Tap the new date.
Entering receipt details
Expense provides a variety of options that you can associate with an item. These
options appear in the Receipt Details dialog box.
To open the Receipt Details dialog box:
1. Tap the Expense item to which you want to assign details.
2. Tap Details.
3. Select any of the following options:
Tap date
Category Opens a pick list of system and user-defined categories.
See “Categorizing records” in Chapter 4 for more information.
Type Opens a pick list of expense types.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense
106
4. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.
Customizing the Currency pick list
You can select the currencies and symbols that appear in the Currency pick list.
To customize the Currency pick list:
1. Tap the Currency pick list in the Receipt Details dialog box, and then select Edit
currencies.
2. Tap each Currency pick list and select the country whose currency you want to
display on that line.
3. Press Function + Enter or tap OK to close the Select Currencies dialog
box.
4. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.
Payment Enables you to choose the payment method used to pay the
Expense item. If the item is prepaid (such as airline tickets
supplied by your company), you can choose Prepaid to place your
expense in the appropriate company-paid cell of your printed
expense report.
Currency Enables you to choose the type of currency used to pay the
Expense item. The default currency unit is defined in the
Preferences dialog box. You can also display up to four other
common types of currency. See “Customizing the Currency pick
list” later in this chapter for more information.
Vendor and
City Enables you to record the name of the vendor (usually a company)
associated with the expense and the city where the expense was
incurred. For example, a business lunch might be at Rosie’s Cafe
(Vendor) in San Francisco (City).
Attendees See “Looking up names to add to Expense records” in Chapter 4
for more information.
Tap Edit
currencies
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing the Currency pick list
107
Changing the default currency
You can select which currency appears by default when you’re entering Expense
items. You can override this setting when entering individual expense items.
To change your default currency:
1. Open Expense.
2. Press Command Stroke + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on the
Options menu.
3. Tap the Default Currency pick list.
4. Select the currency symbol that you want to appear in Expense.
5. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.
Defining a custom currency symbol
If the currency you want to use is not in the list of countries, you can create your
own custom country and currency symbol.
To define a custom currency symbol:
1. Press Command Stroke + Y.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Custom
Currencies on the Options menu.
2. Tap one of the four Country boxes.
Tap a Country
box
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense
108
3. Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want to appear in
Expense.
4. Press Function + Enter or tap OK to close the Currency Properties dialog
box.
5. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.
NOTE If you want to use your custom currency symbol as the default for all Expense
items, select the symbol in the Preferences dialog box. If you want to use your
custom currency symbol only for a particular Expense item, select the symbol in the
Receipt Details dialog box associated with that item.
Setting Show Options
Show Options defines the sort order and other settings that relate to your Expense
items.
To open the Show Options dialog box:
1. In the Expense list, tap Show.
2. Select any of the options.
3. Press Function + Enter or tap OK.
Sort by Enables you to sort expense items by date or type.
Distance Enables you to display Mileage entries in miles or kilometers.
Show currency Shows or hides the currency symbol in the Expense list.
Tap Show
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Working with Expense data on your computer
109
Working with Expense data on your computer
After you enter your expenses into the Expense application on your handheld and
perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software enables you to do any of the
following on your computer. See the Palm Desktop software online help for details.
This feature is not avaialble on Mac computers.
■Add, modify, and delete your Expense data.
■Organize your Expense data by category, amount, date, type, or notes.
■View Expense data in various formats: List, Large Icons, or Small Icons.
■Record individual expenses in various currencies and display the total in one
selected currency type.
■Print Expense reports.
■Transfer Expense data to other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, using the
Send command or Export command, and import data in popular file formats.
Displaying the euro on your computer
When you perform a HotSync operation, the euro symbol is transferred to Palm
Desktop software like any other piece of data on your handheld. The symbol
appears in Palm Desktop software, however, only if you are using fonts that
support the euro symbol.
These fonts are part of the operating system on your computer. They do not reside
with your Desktop application, and they are not produced by Palm, Inc. For more
information refer to the documentation that accompanies your desktop
computer’s operating system.
Printing the euro
Even with operating system support, problems may arise when you print
documents that contain the euro. When a font is present on both the printer and
the computer, the printer font is used by default to increase printing speed. If the
printer font does not include the euro, a box is printed instead of the euro symbol.
These fonts are part of the operating system on your computer. They do not reside
with your Desktop application, and they are not produced by Palm, Inc. For more
information, refer to the documentation that accompanies your desktop
computer’s operating system.
Using Expense menus
Expense menus are shown here for your reference, and Expense features that are
not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 9 Using Expense
110
Record menu
Options menu
Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can select
automatic fill and default currency options.
Use automatic fill. Enables you to select an expense type by
typing the first letter of an expense type. For example, if you
type the letter T, it enters the “Taxi” expense type. Typing T and
then E enters Telephone, which is the first expense type beginning
with the letters TE.
About Expense Shows version information for Expense.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
111
CHAPTER 10
Using Memo Pad
Memo Pad provides a place to take notes that are not associated with
records in Date Book, Address Book, or To Do List. The number of memos
you can store is dependent only on the memory available on your handheld.
Use Memo Pad to do the following:
■Send memos to popular computer applications like Microsoft Word when you
synchronize using Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology.
■Assign memos to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical
groups.
■Write down phone numbers and other types of information that you can later
copy and paste into other applications.
NOTE You can encrypt your Memo Pad memos. For more information,
see “Encrypting your data” in Chapter 18.
To open Memo Pad:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the Memo Pad icon .
Creating memos
A record in Memo Pad is called a memo. You can assign memos to categories and
mark them private as described in Chapter 4. This section covers how to create a
memo.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 10 Using Memo Pad
112
To create a new memo:
1. Open Memo Pad.
2. Tap New.
TIP In the Memo list screen, you can also begin typing to create a new memo.
The first letter is automatically capitalized and begins your new memo. If you
have a memo open, you can press Command Stroke + N.
3. Enter the text that you want to appear in the memo.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Reviewing memos
The first line of a memo appears in the Memo list. This makes it easy to locate and
review your memos.
To review a memo:
1. In the Memo list, select the text of the memo.
TIP You can also select, review, and move between memos with the navigator.
See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.
2. Review or edit the text in the memo.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Tap New
Select a memo
to review
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Memo Pad menus
113
Using Memo Pad menus
Memo Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Memo Pad features that
are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
The Record and Options menus differ depending on whether you’re displaying the
Memo list or an individual memo.
Record menus
Options menus
Send Category Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send all
records in the selected category to another device. The options
available depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Send Memo Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send the
selected memo to another device. The options available depend
on the software installed on your handheld.
Memo list
Memo screen
Preferences Displays the Memo Preferences dialog box, where you define
the sort order for memos.
About Memo Pad Shows version information for Memo Pad.
Memo list Memo screen
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 10 Using Memo Pad
114
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
115
CHAPTER 11
Using Note Pad
Note Pad provides a place to take notes in your own handwriting. You can
use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a
pencil. Use Note Pad to do the following:
■Take notes, draw a sketch, or write any kind of message directly on your
handheld screen. Later, you can enter this information into other applications.
■Set an alarm to use your notes as reminder messages.
■Assign notes to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical
groups.
■Exchange notes with other devices that have Note Pad 2.0 installed.
■Use Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology to copy and paste
notes into popular computer applications like Microsoft Word, or to send notes
as e-mail attachments.
NOTE You can encrypt your Note pad notes. For more information, see “Encrypting
your data” in Chapter 18.
To open Note Pad:
1. Press Home .
2. Select the Note Pad icon .
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 11 Using Note Pad
116
Creating a note
A record in Note Pad is called a note. You can assign notes to categories and mark
them private as described in Chapter 4. This section covers how to create a note.
To create a new note:
1. Tap New.
2. Write the information directly on the handheld screen.
Tap the pen selector to select a different pen width, or select the eraser to remove
unwanted strokes.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
To clear the screen:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Edit, and then select Clear Note.
Reviewing notes
The note title and the date you created the note appear in the Note Pad list. If you
did not assign a title to your note, the time you created the note appears as the note
title. This makes it easy to locate and review your notes.
To review a note:
1. In the Note Pad list, select the note title.
TIP You can also select, review, and move between notes with the navigator.
See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.
Pen selector
Write
information
here
Enter title here
Eraser
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Changing Note Pad color settings
117
2. Review or edit the contents of the note.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Changing Note Pad color settings
By default, your notes appear with a white “paper” background, and the ink from
the pen is blue. You can change the color of both the paper and the ink from the
pen. Your color selections apply to all your notes. You cannot change the color
settings for individual notes.
To set the colors:
1. In the Note Pad list, press Command Stroke + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Preferences on the
Options menu.
2. Tap Color.
3. Tap Pen, and then tap the color of ink you want to use.
4. Tap Paper, and then tap the color of paper you want to use.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
T
ap arrows to scro
ll
to
next and previous notes
Select a
note to view
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 11 Using Note Pad
118
Setting an alarm for a note
You can set an alarm for a specific time and date to remind you to follow up on
anote.
To set an alarm for a note:
1. Tap the note to which you want to assign an alarm.
2. Press Command Stroke + A.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Alarm on the
Options menu.
3. Tap the Date box.
4. Tap the year, month, and date you want the alarm to sound.
After you tap the date, the Set Alarm dialog box reappears.
5. Tap the Time box.
6. Tap the hour and minute columns to select the time you want the alarm to occur.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Tap here to select month
Tap here to select year
Tap here to select date
Tap here to
select minutes
Tap here to
select hour
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Note Pad menus
119
8. When the alarm goes off and the reminder message appears onscreen, do one of
the following:
– Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to permanently dismiss the
reminder and return to the current screen.
– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. An
attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind
you of the pending alarm, and the reminder message appears again in
five minutes. When the reminder message reappears, the current time
appears in the Reminder bar and the note title appears on the screen.
– If you did not title the note, the time the note was created appears on the
screen.
– Tap Go To to open Note Pad. Note Pad will open and display the note
associated with the alarm.
Using Note Pad menus
Note Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Note Pad features that are
not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
The Record menu is the same when you’re viewing the Note Pad list and an
individual note. The Options menu differs depending on whether you’re viewing
the Note Pad list or an individual note.
Record menu
Send Category Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send all records in the selected category to another device. The
options available depend on the software installed on your
handheld.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 11 Using Note Pad
120
Options menus
Send Note Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send the selected note to another device. The options available
depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Compatibility Displays the Compatibility dialog box, where you can choose to
beam notes to a previous version of Note Pad.
Preferences Displays the Note Pad Preferences dialog box, where you
define the pen and paper color, the sort order for notes, and the
alarm sound.
Details Displays the Note Details dialog box, where you assign a
category and privacy option for a note.
About Note Pad Shows version information for Note Pad.
Note Pad list Note screen
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
121
CHAPTER 12
Using PalmTM Photos
PalmTM Photos enables you to view, and manage photos on your handheld
or an expansion card. Use Palm Photos to do the following:
■Locate photos quickly with the Thumbnail and List views.
■Organize photos into albums.
■Play a slide show of your photos.
■Sort photos by name or date.
■View details for each photo.
■Keep track of your thoughts about a photo by entering notes.
■Exchange photos with other devices that use infrared or e-mail communication.
■Use Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology to transfer photos to
your handheld, to copy and paste photos into popular computer applications,
and to send photos as e-mail attachments or to other applications.
To open Palm Photos:
1. Press Home .
2. Select the Photo icon .
Viewing photos
A record in Palm Photos is called a photo. Photos can be a file that you transfer
from your computer, store on an expansion card, or receive from another device.
This section covers how to view, manage, and exchange photos that are stored on
your handheld or on an expansion card that is seated in the expansion slot. For
information on transferring photos from your computer, see “Installing and
removing applications” in Chapter 4 and the online Help in Palm Desktop
software.
You can use Palm Photos to view the following types of photos:
■JPG files
■TIFF files
■BMP files
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos
122
■GIF files
Viewing photos in Thumbnail view
Thumbnail view displays miniature versions of your photos so that you can see
several photos on the screen at the same time. Use this view to browse through
photos or to locate a photo when you don’t know the name of the photo.
To view photos in Thumbnail view:
1. Tap the Thumbnail icon .
2. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album you want
to view.
3. Tap the thumbnail of the photo you want to view.
TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the
navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a
specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.
4. Tap anywhere on the screen to return to Thumbnail view.
Select a photo
to view
Album
pick list
Thumbnail icon
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Viewing photos
123
Viewing photos in List view
List view displays a list of your photos so that you can see the names and dates
associated with your photos. Use this view to locate a photo when you know the
name or the date the photo was created.
To view photos in List view:
1. Tap the List icon .
2. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album you want
to view.
3. Tap the name of the photo you want to view.
TIP You can also browse and select a photo with the navigator. See “Using the
navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.
4. Tap anywhere on the screen to return to List view.
Viewing a slide show
A slide show is a sequential presentation of each of the photos in the current
album. You can set the length of time each photo remains on the screen in the
Preferences dialog box.
S
e
l
ect a p
h
oto
to view
Album
pick list
List icon
Tap and drag
divider to
resize columns
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos
124
To view a slide show:
1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album you want
to view.
2. Tap Slide Show.
To adjust the delay between photos during a slide show:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Tap the pick list and select the delay interval: 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5
seconds, or 1 minute.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Rotating photos
If a photo appears in the wrong orientation, you can rotate the photo.
To rotate and photo:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Photo, and then select Rotate.
Tap Slide Show Tap Slide Show
Alb
um
pick list
Alb
um
pick list
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Viewing photos
125
3. Tap the photo you want to rotate.
TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the
navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a
specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.
4. Select the new orientation.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Viewing photo information
The Photo Details dialog box enables you to view information about a photo and
to change the photo name, assign it to an album, add a note about the photo, and
delete a photo.
To review photo information:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Photo, and then select Details.
3. Tap the photo for which you want to view information.
TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the
navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a
specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.
4. Review or edit the information.
5. Press Function + Enter twice, or tap Done twice.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos
126
Organizing photos
There are several ways you can organize your photos. You can sort photos in the
List view, file photos in albums, and copy photos to an expansion card
Sorting photos in List view
In List view you can sort photos in ascending or descending order by name or date.
To sort photos in List view:
1. Tap a column heading to sort the photos based on that item.
2. Tap the column heading to sort the photos in reverse order.
Creating an album
The process for creating a new photo album is identical to creating a new category
in your other handheld applications.
To create an album:
1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Select Edit Albums.
3. Tap New.
4. Enter a title for the album.
Tap here to
sort by date
Tap here to
sort by name
Tap New
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Organizing photos
127
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Filing photos in albums
You can organize the photos on your handheld by filing them into different
albums. Since each expansion card is viewed as it’s own album, you cannot file
photos stored on an expansion card in albums.
To file photos in albums:
1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album to which
you want to add photos.
2. Tap Organize.
Plus signs appear next to the photos that are part of the selected album.
3. Tap any photos you want to add to the current album.
A plus sign appears next to photos you select.
4. Tap any photos you want to remove from the current album.
The plus sign next to the selected photos disappear.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Tap Organize
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos
128
Copying and Moving photos
The Copy command enables you to make a copy of a photo on your handheld or
an expansion card. If the photo is currently located on your handheld it is copied
to an expansion card, and vice-a-versa. The Move command transfers the photo
from your handheld to an expansion card or vice-a-versa.
To copy or move photos:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Photo, and then select the appropriate Copy or Move command.
3. Tap the photo(s) you want to copy.
A plus sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.
TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the
navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a
specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.
4. Tap Copy, or Tap Move.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Renaming or deleting an album
You can rename or delete any of the albums that you create. You cannot rename or
delete the Camera album or the Unfiled Album. For information about renaming
an expansion card, see “Renaming a card” in Chapter 7.
When you delete an album you delete all the photos in that album are reassigned
to the Unfiled album.
Tap Copy
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Organizing photos
129
To rename an album:
1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Select Edit Albums.
3. Select the album you want to rename.
4. Tap Rename.
5. Enter the new name.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
To delete an album:
1. Tap the Album pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Select Edit Albums.
3. Select the album you want to delete.
4. When the confirmation dialog box appears, tap Delete.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Tap Rename
Tap Delete
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos
130
Beaming photos
The Beam command enables you to beam photos to other devices that are enabled
with infrared technology.
To beam photos:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Photo, and then select Beam.
3. Tap the photo(s) you want to beam.
A plus sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.
TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the
navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a
specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.
4. Tap Beam.
5. Point the IR port on your handheld at the IR port on the receiving device.
See “Beaming data” in Chapter 3 for additional information on beaming data.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Sending photos
Query: How are the photos going to be send in Montana?
The Send command enables you to send photos to other devices.
Tap Beam
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Sending photos
131
To send photos:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Photo, and then select Send.
3. Tap the photo(s) you want to send.
A plus sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.
TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the
navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a
specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.
4. Tap Send.
5. If the Send With dialog box appears, select the transport method you want to
use, and then tap OK.
6. Enter the recipient’s GSM mobile phone number.
TIP You can also tap To to select from a list of recent recipients, or tap Lookup
to select a number from your Address Book.
7. Tap Send.
8. Wait for the Send Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue working on your handheld.
9. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Tap Send
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos
132
Deleting photos
If you no longer want a photo on your handheld or expansion card, you can delete
the photo. Photos that were stored on your handheld and were synchronized with
the Desktop software will be removed from Palm Photos on your computer the
next time you perform a HotSync operation.
If you want to keep a copy of a photo, make a copy of the photo in another folder
on your computer before you perform the next HotSync operation.
NOTE Photos that are stored on an expansion card are not backed-up during
HotSync operations. To transfer or back up a photo from an expansion card you must
use a card reader that is attached to your computer.
To delete photos:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Photo, and then select Delete.
3. Tap the photo(s) you want to delete.
An X sign appears next to the photo(s) you select.
TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator. Press Select on the
navigator to insert the highlight, press Up, Down, Right, or Left to highlight a
specific photo, and then press Select to view the photo.
4. Tap Delete.
5. When the confirmation dialog box appears, tap Delete.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Tap Delete
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Working with photos on your computer
133
Working with photos on your computer
After you take and manage photos on your handheld and perform a HotSync
operation, Palm Desktop software enables you to do any of the following on your
Windows computer. See the Palm Desktop software online help for details. This
feature is not available on Mac computers.
■View photos in various formats: List, Thumbnails, Details, and Handheld
preview.
■Drag photos onto the Palm Quick Install icon or the Palm Photos desktop
window to install them on your handheld or an expansion card during the next
HotSync operation.
■Modify and delete your photos.
■Organize your photos and add notes.
■Transfer photos to other applications using the Send command or Export
command, and import data in popular file formats.
Using Palm Photos menus
Palm Photos menus are shown here for your reference, and Palm Photos features
that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
The menus are the same when you’re viewing the Palm Photos list and an
individual photo.
Photo menu
Options menus
Need
screenshot
About Photos Shows version information for Palm Photos.
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 12 Using PalmTM Photos
134
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
135
CHAPTER 13
Using To Do List
To Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the things
that you have to do. Use To Do List for the following:
■Make a quick and convenient list of things to do.
■Assign a priority level to each task.
■Assign a due date for any or all of your To Do List items.
■Assign To Do List items to categories so that you can organize and view them
in logical groups.
■Sort your To Do List items by due date, priority level, or category.
■Attach notes to individual To Do List items for a description or clarification of
the task.
To open To Do List:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the To Do icon .
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 13 Using To Do List
136
Creating list items
A To Do List item is a reminder of some task that you have to complete. A record
in To Do List is called an item.
To create a To Do List item:
1. Do one of the following:
–Tap New.
– If no To Do List item is currently selected, begin typing.
2. Enter the text of the To Do List item. The text can be longer than one line.
3. Tap anywhere onscreen to deselect the To Do List item.
Setting priority
You can use priority setting for items to arrange the tasks in your To Do List
according to their importance or urgency. The default setting for the To Do List is
to arrange items by priority and due date, with priority 1 items at the top. If you
have a number of items in your list, changing an item’s priority setting may move
its position in the list.
When you create a new To Do List item, its priority is automatically set to level 1,
the highest (most important) level. If you select another item first, however, the
item you create appears beneath the selected item and is given the same priority as
the selected item.
Tap New
New To Do
item
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Checking off a To Do List item
137
To set the priority of a To Do List item:
1. Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do List item.
2. Select the Priority number that you want to set (1 is most important).
Checking off a To Do List item
You can check off a To Do List item to indicate that you’ve completed it. You can
set the To Do List to record the date that you complete the To Do item, and you can
choose to show or hide completed items. See “Setting To Do Preferences” later in
this chapter.
To check off a To Do List item:
■Tap the check box on the left side of the item.
TIP You can also highlight the item you want to check off, and then press
Select on the navigator.
Select
priority
Tap here
Completed
To Do item
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 13 Using To Do List
138
Changing To Do List item details
The To Do Item Details dialog box enables you to change settings for individual
items.
To display the To Do Item Details dialog box:
1. Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change.
TIP You can also select an item with the navigator.
2. Tap Details.
Setting a due date
You can associate a due date with any To Do List item. You can also sort the items
that appear in the list based on their due dates.
To set a due date for a To Do List item:
1. In the Details dialog box, tap No Date to open the Due Date pick list.
2. Tap the date that you want to assign the item:
Today Assigns the current date.
Tomorrow Assigns tomorrow’s date.
One week later Assigns the date exactly one week from the current date.
No Date Removes the due date from the item.
Choose date Opens the date selector, where you can choose any date
that you want for the item.
Tap here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting To Do Preferences
139
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Show options
dialog box, you can tap directly on the due date in the To Do List to open the
pick list shown in step 2.
Setting To Do Preferences
The To Do Preferences dialog box enables you to control the appearance of To Do
List and of To Do items in the Date Book Agenda view.
To change the Preferences settings:
1. In To Do List, tap Show.
2. Select any of the following settings:
Show Completed
Items Displays your completed items in the To Do List. If you turn
off this setting, your To Do items disappear from the list when
you complete (check) them.
Items that no longer appear on the list because you turn off
this setting have not been deleted. They are still in the
memory of your handheld. Purge completed items to remove
them from memory.
Show Only Due
Items Shows only the items that are currently due, are past due, or
have no due date specified. When this setting is active, items
that are not yet due do not appear in the list until their due
dates.
Record
Completion Date Replaces the due date with the actual date when you
complete (check) the item. If you do not assign a due date to
an item, the completion date still records when you complete
the item.
Show Due Dates Displays the due dates associated with items in the To Do List
and displays an exclamation mark next to items that remain
incomplete after the due date passes.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 13 Using To Do List
140
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Using To Do List menus
To Do List menus are shown here for your reference, and To Do List features that
are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Record menu
Options menu
Show Priorities Shows the priority setting for each item.
Show Categories Shows the category for each item.
Send Item Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send the selected item to another device. The options available
depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Send Category Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send all records in the selected category to another device. The
options available depend on the software installed on your
handheld.
About To Do List Shows version information for To Do List.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
141
CHAPTER 14
Using Palm™ VersaMail™
PersonalE-mailSoftware
With the VersaMail application, you can send, receive, and manage e-mail on your
handheld. This chapter describes how to set up different types of e-mail accounts
and explains how to use the many e-mail features in the VersaMail application.
The VersaMail application version 2.5 is the newest offering in the line of Palm
personal e-mail software applications. Formerly known as MultiMail® software,
version 2.5 of the VersaMail application contains new features that make sending
and receiving e-mail messages and managing e-mail accounts easier than ever.
What’s newKey features of the VersaMail 2.5 application include the following:
■Support for both the Tungsten C navigator and keyboard, simplifying data
entry and navigation
■Support for the built-in 802.11b radio in your handheld, enabling wireless
e-mail connectivity
■Enhanced use of color, fonts, styles, and user-selected display options
■Basic HTML formatting display for e-mail messages received in HTML format
■Increased number of file types supported for sending and receiving as
attachments
■Scheduled retrieval of new e-mail, with notification
■Improved message addressing capabilities
■Enhanced security for sending and retrieving messages
Getting started with the VersaMail application
The VersaMail application is built into your handheld and does not need to be
installed. To start using the application, simply press the VersaMail button on
your handheld.
If you are using a Windows computer, the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit
installs automatically when you install the Palm Desktop software. See
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
142
“Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop” later in this
chapter for information on using the conduit.
Synchronizing an existing username
If you plan to synchronize your Tungsten C handheld with an existing username
by performing a HotSync operation, you must do so before you enter your e-mail
account information in the VersaMail application. If you enter the e-mail account
information first and then synchronize your handheld to an existing username, the
username information overwrites the e-mail account information you entered.
Upgrading a MultiMail/VersaMail database
If you have previously used a Palm personal e-mail application such as MultiMail
SE or MultiMail Deluxe, or used version 2.0 of the VersaMail application, you can
upgrade your e-mail database for use with the VersaMail 2.5 application.
To upgrade an existing e-mail database for use with the VersaMail application:
1. Perform a HotSync operation with a user profile that contains the existing
e-mail database. To do so, press the HotSync button ™, and then select a
profile that contains an e-mail database from the displayed list of users.
2. Press the VersaMail button on your handheld.
3. Tap Yes to accept the upgrade.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
With the VersaMail application, you can access e-mail accounts from providers
such as Earthlink or Yahoo. You may also access your corporate e-mail with the
appropriate mail server configuration. See “Accessing corporate e-mail” later in
this chapter for more information.
You can add up to eight e-mail accounts on your handheld by setting up a
connection to a network provider or synchronizing to a desktop e-mail application.
For example, if you have a Yahoo e-mail account with POP access, you can create
a new account in the VersaMail application and name that new account Yahoo, so
that you can send and receive e-mail on your handheld using your Yahoo account.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
143
Account and connection types
Two types of e-mail accounts are supported:
■Network: You can send and receive e-mail directly to and from your handheld
by connecting with a network provider.
■Synchronize Only (Windows computers only): You can download, view, and
manage e-mail between the handheld and a desktop e-mail application, such as
Microsoft Outlook, by performing a HotSync operation using the cradle/cable.
You can’t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for an account
of this type.
Using a network account, you can set up or access an e-mail account using any of
the following connection methods:
■Built-in 802.11b radio on your handheld
■Palm™ Bluetooth Card (sold separately) attached through the expansion card
slot connection to a mobile phone or local access point that is enabled with
Bluetooth technology
■PalmModem® accessory (sold separately)
■External modem sled (sold separately)
■Infrared (IR) port on the handheld to infrared port on a mobile phone
■Direct connection to a mobile phone by means of a physical cable
■Handheld cradle connected to your desktop (Windows users only)
Setting up a network e-mail account
Before you can set up a network e-mail account, you must do the following:
■Establish the e-mail account with a network provider. Common network
providers include Internet service providers (ISPs) such as Earthlink and
Prodigy. A provider can also be a wireless GSM or GPRS carrier such as
VoiceStream, Cingular, or VodaFone.
■Configure the service connection settings for this account on your handheld
using your handheld’s Network Preferences and Connection Preferences
screens. See Chapter 18 for more information.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
144
You must also have the appropriate prerequisite for the type of connection you
want to make, as follows.
Using an ISP
If you are setting up a new e-mail account and have a well-known ISP such as
Earthlink or Mindspring, many of the required settings during the account setup
are automatically configured.
For other ISPs, you need the following information:
■The protocol used for incoming mail, such as POP or IMAP
■The name of the incoming mail server
■The name of the outgoing mail (SMTP) server
■Whether your e-mail account requires any encryption, such as APOP or ESMTP
■Your e-mail address and password
■The login script (if any) that you need for connecting to your ISP or mail server
Connection Type Prerequisite
Dial-up modem connection via
built-in 802.11b radio Proximity to an 802.11b hub.
High-speed GPRS Palm Bluetooth Card and mobile phone or
LAN access point enabled with Bluetooth
technology.
Active GPRS service ordered from your
wireless carrier.
GSM dial-up Palm Bluetooth Card and mobile phone or
LAN access point enabled with Bluetooth
technology.
Active wireless service with a GSM carrier. If
you are using GPRS, the same carrier
generally provides both GSM and GPRS
service.
Note that some GSM carriers require you to
order a special data service (separate from
voice service) to make a network connection.
PalmModem accessory PalmModem accessory.
External modem sled Wireless modem accessory.
IR to IR phone IR-enabled mobile phone.
Direct connection to a phone by
means of a physical cable Connector cable and mobile phone.
Handheld cradle connected to
desktop Handheld cradle and cable (Windows users
only).
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
145
NOTE Information about your e-mail account is available from the e-mail provider.
Depending on the type of e-mail service you have, you may be able to access this
information by going to the e-mail provider’s web site or by contacting the provider’s
customer support.
Using a corporate e-mail account
If you want to access e-mail on your handheld using your corporate e-mail
account, you create this account on your handheld in exactly the same way as any
other account (see “Setting up a network e-mail account” later in this chapter),
with one exception: for a corporate e-mail account, you may need to set up a virtual
private network (VPN). See the following section “VPNs” for information.
With a corporate e-mail account, you can access the following types of mail servers,
among others:
■Microsoft Exchange
■Domino
■Sun iPlanet
See “Creating a network e-mail account” later in this chapter for instructions on
setting up a corporate e-mail account on your handheld.
VPNs
If you want to access e-mail on your handheld using your corporate e-mail
account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your
handheld. A VPN enables you to log into your corporate mail server through the
company’s firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot “break through”
the firewall to gain access to the mail server.
You need to set up a VPN to access corporate e-mail in either of the following two
situations:
■Your company’s network is located outside of the firewall
■You company’s network is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to
access the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public
location or at home)
NOTE Check with your company’s server administrator to see if a VPN is required to
access the corporate network.
See (X-REF) for instructions on setting up a VPN on your handheld. See “Creating
a network e-mail account” later in this chapter for information on choosing your
VPN connection in the VersaMail application (after you have set it up on your
handheld) for sending and receiving e-mail.
NOTE You cannot use push mail with notification or scheduled sending retry of
e-mail with accounts that use a VPN connection. See “Push mail with notification”
and “Send retry” later in this chapter for information.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
146
Creating a network e-mail account
You create a new account in Account Setup, which guides you through the process.
To create a network e-mail account:
1. Press Function + Menu , select Accounts, and select Account Setup.
2. Tap New.
3. Enter the following:
If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you
selected, it displays the correct protocol.
4. Tap Next.
Account Name Enter a descriptive name for the account, such as “My Yahoo.”
Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which
you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed. If you
set up a VPN on your handheld, the VPN connection appears
in the Mail Service pick list. Select this connection if you want
to connect to your corporate network using the VPN. See
“VPNs” earlier in this chapter for information.
Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most e-mail
providers use the POP protocol.)
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
147
Entering the account username and password
In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you enter the username and
password for this account.
To enter the account username and password:
1. Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is generally the part of
your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire
e-mail address.
2. Tap the Password box, and then enter your password.
3. Press Function +Enter , or tap OK. The Password box displays the word
“Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.
4. Tap Next.
Entering the name of the outgoing and incoming mail server
You need to verify your e-mail address for the account you are accessing, as well
as enter the name of the outgoing and incoming mail servers.
To enter mail server settings:
1. If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on the
Account Setup screen, the e-mail address field is completed automatically
based on the username and mail service you entered. Check the address to
verify that it is correct, and edit it if necessary.
If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen,
enter the e-mail address for your account.
E-mail address will be filled in
automatically if you chose a
preconfigured mail service
Mail servers will be filled in
automatically if the VersaMail
application knows the names based
on the mail service you chose
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
148
2. Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as
pop.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
3. Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as
smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
4. Tap Next.
5. Do one of the following:
– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap
Done. This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up. See “Getting,
sending, and managing e-mail” later in this chapter for information on
getting and sending e-mail.
– To set up additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of
procedures.
Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account
The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether
your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.
To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:
1. (Optional) Select any of the following:
– Select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your
handheld. If you don’t choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all of your
e-mail messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your
Inbox, including messages you have already read. To get all mail (including
mail you have already read) and not just unread mail, deselect Get unread
mail ONLY.
– To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when they are deleted in
the VersaMail application, select the Delete messages on the server when
they are deleted in VersaMail check box.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
149
– (POP account only) To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the
server so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave mail on
server check box. For example, if you create an account to receive e-mail from
your Yahoo account and select this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still
visible the next time you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.
– You should not need to change the port number setting. The port number
setting defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers, respectively. If you
are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server
administrator.
– To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL)
connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.
– To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message, enter the size in
kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size. The maximum size of an
incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter a smaller size. The
maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and
2MB total, including attachments.
2. Tap Next.
Setting outgoing mail options
Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.
POP
accounts
IMAP
accounts
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
150
To set outgoing mail options:
1. (Optional) Do any of the following:
2. Tap Next.
Adding a signature
If you want, you can add a signature to each e-mail message you send. For
example, you can enter your name and telephone number so that it appears on
each message you send.
Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing
messages, such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different
from the e-mail address from which you are sending the
message. For example, if you are sending a message from
me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to reply to
me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. Reply To
Address makes it look as though the e-mail came from the
address you entered.
BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the
message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages
you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate
e-mail account, enter that e-mail address.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
151
To add a personal signature:
1. Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box, and then enter the text of the
signature.
This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.
2. Tap Next.
Setting advanced outgoing mail options
You can set additional outgoing mail options.
To set advanced outgoing mail options:
1. (Optional) Select any of the following:
– You should not need to change the outgoing mail port number setting. The
default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure
about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.
– To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL)
connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.
– Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) if the outgoing server
(SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator
before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for information. If you select this option, you will be prompted to
enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the
Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Signature lines appear only if
check box is selected
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
152
Testing your new account
After you finish setting up a new e-mail account, the Inbox of the account you just
created is displayed. You can test whether the e-mail account is set up and working
properly by tapping Get Mail. See “Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire
message” later in this chapter for more information.
Creating a synchronize-only account
NOTE You must be using a Windows computer to create a synchronize-only account.
A synchronize-only e-mail account enables you to download, view, and manage
e-mail between the handheld and a desktop e-mail application, such as Microsoft
Outlook, by performing a HotSync operation by means of the cradle/cable. You
can’t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for any account of this
type.
To create a synchronize-only e-mail account:
1. Press Function + Menu , select Accounts, and then select Account
Setup.
2. Tap New.
3. Do the following:
Account Name Enter a descriptive name for this account, such as “My Yahoo.”
Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which
you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed. If you
set up a VPN on your handheld, the VPN connection appears
in the Mail Service pick list. Select this connection if you want
to connect to your corporate network using the VPN. See
“VPNs” earlier in this chapter for information.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
153
If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you
selected, it displays the correct protocol.
4. On the same screen, select the Synchronize Only Account check box.
5. Tap Next.
Entering the account username and password
In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you enter the username and
password for this account.
To enter the account username and password:
1. Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is generally the part of
your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire
e-mail address.
Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most mail
providers use the POP protocol.)
Select check box for a
synchronize-only account
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
154
2. Tap the Password box, and then enter your password.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. The Password box displays the word
“Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.
4. Tap Next.
Entering the name of the outgoing and incoming mail server
You need to enter your e-mail address for the account you are accessing as well as
the name of the outgoing and incoming mail servers.
To enter mail server settings:
1. If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on the
Account Setup screen, the e-mail address field is completed automatically
based on the username and mail service you entered. Check the address to
verify that it is correct, and edit it if necessary.
If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen,
enter the e-mail address for your account.
2. Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as
pop.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
3. Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as
smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
4. Tap Next.
5. Do one of the following:
– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap
Done. After you finish setting up a synchronize-only e-mail account, you
need to configure this account on your desktop. See “Configuring an account
in HotSync Manager” later in this chapter for information. You will not be
able to synchronize e-mail between your handheld and your desktop until
you configure the account on your desktop.
E-mail address will be filled in
automatically if you chose a
preconfigured mail service
Mail servers will be filled in
automatically if the VersaMail
application knows the names based
on the mail service you chose
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
155
– To set up additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of
procedures.
Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account
The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether
your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.
To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:
1. (Optional) Select any of the following:
– Select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your
handheld. If you don’t choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all your
e-mail messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your
Inbox, including messages you have already read. To get all mail (including
mail you have already read) and not just unread mail, deselect Get unread
mail ONLY.
– To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when they are deleted in
the VersaMail application, select the Delete messages on the server when
they are deleted in VersaMail check box.
– (POP account only) To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the
server so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave mail on
server check box. For example, if you create an account to receive e-mail from
your Yahoo account and select this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still
visible the next time you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.
– You should not need to change the port number setting. The port number
setting defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers, respectively. If you
are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server
administrator.
– To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL)
connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.
– To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message, enter the size in
kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size. The maximum size of an
incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter a smaller size. The
maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and
2MB total, including attachments.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
156
2. Tap Next.
Setting outgoing mail options
Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.
To set outgoing mail options:
1. (Optional) Enter or select any of the following:
2. Tap Next.
Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages,
such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To
Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different from the
e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For
example, if you are sending a message from “me@yahoo.com”
but you want recipients to reply to “me@earthlink.net,” enter the
reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look as though
the e-mail came from the address you entered.
BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message.
For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from
your handheld to be sent to your corporate e-mail account, enter
that e-mail address.
POP
accounts
IMAP
accounts
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
157
Adding a signature
If you want, you can add a signature to each e-mail message you send. For
example, you can enter your name and telephone number so that it appears on
each message you send.
To add a personal signature:
1. Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box, and then enter the text of the
signature.
This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Setting advanced outgoing mail options
You can set additional outgoing mail options.
To set advanced outgoing mail options:
1. (Optional) Select any of the following:
– You should not need to change the outgoing mail port number setting. The
default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure
about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.
– To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL)
connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.
– Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) if the outgoing server
(SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator
before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for information. If you select this option, you will be prompted to
enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the
Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.
Signature lines appear only if
check box is selected
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
158
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Configuring your synchronize-only account
After you finish setting up a synchronize-only e-mail account, you need to
configure this account on your desktop. See “Configuring an account in HotSync
Manager” later in this chapter for information. You will not be able to synchronize
e-mail between your handheld and your desktop until you configure the account
on your desktop.
Setting VersaMail connection preferences
You can set connection preferences for your e-mail accounts. These preferences
apply to all accounts you have set up in the VersaMail application.
To set account connection preferences:
1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options.
3. Select Preferences.
4. Tap Advanced.
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
159
5. Select any of the following preferences:
Editing e-mail accounts
From time to time, you may need to edit information about one of the e-mail
accounts you set up.
To select the account to edit:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Accounts.
3. Select Account Setup.
Enable Smart
Addressing Types ahead and completes a recognized e-mail address. See
the procedure for creating new e-mail later in this chapter for
more information.
Auto-Empty Mail
from Trash Determines how often e-mail messages in the trash are
automatically deleted. See “Emptying the trash” later in this
chapter for more information.
Timeout Sets the number of seconds to try to connect before timing
out. If you are using an adapter with a mobile phone, this
value should be greater than 45 seconds.
To change, tap the Timeout field and enter a new value.
Auto-Disconnect Automatically disconnects your remote connections after
each command. Each command you perform initiates a new
call to your ISP. This setting is not recommended if you plan
to perform multiple e-mail transactions in a short amount of
time.
Disconnect on
Exit Disconnects from the network only after you leave the
VersaMail application. This feature is an alternative to Auto-
Disconnect. This option keeps your connection active while
you perform multiple transactions in the VersaMail
application, but automatically disconnects when you move
on to a different application on your handheld. If this option
is not selected, you must manually disconnect from your ISP.
Modem Wait Displays the number of seconds that the modem uses to
initialize itself. If you have a modem, tap and enter a number
of seconds for the wait. The typical setting for a wireless
modem is 3, and the typical setting for most normal modems
is 0.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
160
4. Tap the name of the account to edit, and then tap Edit.
To edit an account:
1. On the Account Setup screen, change any of the following:
If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you
selected, it displays the correct protocol.
2. Tap Next.
Changing the account username and password
In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you can change the username
and/or password for this account.
Account Name Enter a descriptive name for this account, such as “My
Yahoo.”
Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to
which you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not
listed. If you set up a VPN on your handheld, the VPN
connection appears in the Mail Service pick list. Select this
connection if you want to connect to your corporate network
using the VPN. See “VPNs” earlier in this chapter for
information.
Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most mail
providers use the POP protocol.)
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
161
To edit the account username and password:
1. (Optional) Enter a new username for accessing your e-mail. This is generally the
part of your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your
entire e-mail address.
2. (Optional) Tap the Password box, and then enter a new password. The
Password box displays the word “Assigned” to indicate that a password has
been entered.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK. The Password box displays the word
“Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.
4. Tap Next.
Editing the name of the outgoing and incoming mail server
If your e-mail address or the name of the outgoing and incoming mail servers has
changed or has been entered incorrectly, you can edit the address or server name.
To edit mail server settings:
1. (Optional) Enter a new e-mail address for the account you are accessing, such
as “examplename@yahoo.com.”
2. (Optional) Enter the new or correct name of your incoming (POP) mail server,
such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
162
3. (Optional) Enter the new or correct name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server,
such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
4. Tap Next.
5. Do one of the following:
– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap
Done. This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up. See “Getting,
sending, and managing e-mail” later in this chapter for information on
getting and sending e-mail.
– To edit additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of
procedures.
Editing mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account
The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether
your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.
To edit mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:
1. (Optional) Change any of the following:
– Select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your
handheld. If you don’t choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all your
e-mail messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your
Inbox, including messages you have already read. To get all mail (including
mail you have already read) and not just unread mail, deselect Get unread
mail ONLY.
– To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when they are deleted in
the VersaMail application, select the Delete messages on the server when
they are deleted in VersaMail check box.
– (POP account only) To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the
server so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave mail on
server check box. For example, if you create an account to receive e-mail from
your Yahoo account and select this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still
visible the next time you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
163
– You should not need to change the port number setting. The port number
setting defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers, respectively. If you
are not sure about the correct port number, check with your mail server
administrator.
– To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL)
connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See “Using Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL)” later in this chapter for information on SSL.
– To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message, enter the size in
kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size. The maximum size of an
incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter a smaller size. The
maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and
2MB total, including attachments.
2. Tap Next.
Editing outgoing mail options
Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.
To edit outgoing mail options:
1. (Optional) Change any of the following:
Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages,
such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To
Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different from
the e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For
example, if you are sending a message from me@yahoo.com but
you want recipients to reply to me@earthlink.net, enter the
reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look as though
the e-mail came from the address you entered.
POP
accounts
IMAP
accounts
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
164
2. Tap Next.
Editing a signature
If you added a signature to the e-mail messages you send, you can edit the
signature. For example, you can change your name or the telephone number that
appears in each message you send.
To edit a personal signature:
1. (Optional) To add a signature, select the Attach Signature to messages check
box, and then enter the text of the signature.
To edit existing an signature name, phone number, and so on, edit the
information on the signature lines.
To remove a signature, deselect the Attach Signature to messages check box.
This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.
2. Tap Next.
BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message.
For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from
your handheld to be sent to your corporate e-mail account, enter
that e-mail address.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
165
Editing advanced outgoing mail options
You can change additional outgoing mail options.
To edit advanced outgoing mail options:
1. (Optional) Change any of the following:
– You should not need to change the outgoing mail port number setting. The
default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If you are not sure
about the correct port number, check with your mail server administrator.
– To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or SSL)
connection, select the Use Secure Connection check box. See later in this
chapter for information on SSL.
– Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) if the outgoing server
(SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator
before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for information. If you select this option, you will be prompted to
enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username, tap the
Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Deleting an e-mail account
When you delete an account in the VersaMail application, the account is removed
from your handheld. The account still exists on the server. For example, deleting
your Yahoo account from the VersaMail application deletes only the account from
your handheld. Your e-mail account still exists at Yahoo.com.
To delete an account:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Accounts.
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
166
3. Select Account Setup.
4. Tap the name of the account you want to delete, and then tap Delete.
5. Tap Yes in the Delete Confirmation dialog box to delete the account and all
associated e-mail messages.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
After you perform the next HotSync operation, the memory associated with an
account and its messages is released.
Selecting a different service for a given e-mail account
When you set up connections on your handheld (in the Connection Preferences
screen), you pair each connection with a network service (in the Network
Preferences screen) and then select one of these services to be the default for all
network activity (sending and receiving e-mail, surfing the Web, and so on) on
your handheld. By default, the VersaMail application uses this default service for
sending and receiving messages for all e-mail accounts you set up. See (X-REF) for
information on setting up the default service for your handheld.
However, for any given e-mail account, you have the option of switching to a
different service for use with that account only. For example, the default service
you have selected for your handheld may be called My VPN and use your
handheld’s built-in 802.11b radio to make a dial-up connection to your corporate
mail server. You may also have set up an e-mail account called My Earthlink, which
runs on the My VPN connection by default. However, if you travel into an area that
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
167
has GPRS coverage, you may want to switch your My Earthlink account to the
service called Earthlink GPRS, which connects to a GPRS service using a Palm
Bluetooth Card (sold separately) inserted into your handheld’s expansion card
slot.
To set up a service for a given e-mail account (different from the default service for your handheld):
1. From the Inbox of the account you want to switch, tap Get Mail.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Always connect using check box. A pick list of available services
appears. The currently used connection is displayed by default.
4. Select the connection you want to switch to from the Service pick list.
SHOW
Tap to change the service
connection for this e-mail account
only from your default handheld
service connection
Select a new service connection
for this e-mail account only
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
168
5. Press Function + Enter (alternately, tap OK), and then press Function
+ Enter (or tap OK) again. If there is an existing service connection, it is
disconnected and the new connection is initiated. The VersaMail application
sends and checks for any new e-mail using the new connection.
When you exit the VersaMail application, the new service disconnects. When you
reopen the application, the e-mail account you selected (My Earthlink in this
example) continues to connect using the new connection (Earthlink GPRS in this
example) until you either select a new service or deselect the Always connect using
check box. If you deselect the Always connect using check box, the e-mail account
(My Earthlink) connects using the default handheld service (My VPN in this
example).
The Always connect using check box changes the connection service for the
selected e-mail account only. You must follow the preceding procedure for each
e-mail account whose connection you want to switch from the default connection
on your handheld.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Getting and sending e-mail on your handheld is easy and helps you keep your
business and personal life organized. You can get and send e-mail by simply
tapping one button on the handheld.
You can manage the messages in your e-mail accounts by moving messages
between folders, deleting old e-mail messages individually or in groups, and
marking messages as read or unread.
This section describes how to do the following:
■Get and send e-mail for your e-mail accounts
■View and send e-mail attachments, such as text or Microsoft Word documents,
wirelessly
Getting and reading e-mail
You can get e-mail subjects only—the message size, author, and subject—or you
can get entire messages immediately. If you choose to get message subjects only
and want to read a full message, you can get more of the message.
Choosing the e-mail account and displaying the Inbox
To view the e-mail in an account, you must switch to that account and then get the
e-mail. For example, if you want to collect and view the e-mail from your Yahoo
account, you switch to the account created to retrieve e-mail from your Yahoo
account.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
169
To display an account and its Inbox:
1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .
2. Select Accounts.
3. Press Command + the number of the account you want from the list.
Alternately, tap the name of the account.
TIP You can also press the VersaMail button repeatedly to scroll through
the accounts you have configured in the VersaMail application until you get to
the account you want.
4. Tap the folders pick list, and tap Inbox if the Inbox is not displayed.
Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire message
When you get e-mail messages, you can choose to get the subject only or to get the
entire message. You can also use the Details dialog box to select options for getting
unread e-mail only, downloading attachments, using filters, and more.
To get e-mail messages:
1. Tap Get Mail.
If you have e-mail stored in your Outbox, tap Get & Send.
2. In the Get Mail dialog box, tap Subjects Only to download subjects only, or tap
Messages to download entire messages.
TIP You can turn off the Get Mail dialog box in VersaMail Preferences. See
“Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail” later in this chapter.
SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
170
3. (Optional) Tap Details and select options for retrieving unread e-mail,
downloading attachments, using filters, auto-disconnect, maximum download
size, and default connection type for this account. Tap OK.
NOTE See “Creating mail filters” later in this chapter for more information
about filters. See “Setting VersaMail connection preferences” earlier in this
chapter for information on the auto-disconnect feature. See “Selecting a
different service for a given e-mail account” earlier in this chapter for
information on setting a default connection type.
NOTE The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
5. (Optional) If you are retrieving mail using a VPN connection, you may be asked
to enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN. If so, enter
the username and password. See “VPNs” earlier in this chapter for more
information.
6. The Getting Messages dialog box shows updates as your e-mail is downloaded.
When the Getting Messages dialog box disappears, another dialog box appears
and displays the number of new e-mail messages.
Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
171
A list of your e-mail appears in the Inbox.
Push mail with notification
The VersaMail application features push e-mail. E-mail messages received into a
given e-mail account are pushed to your handheld, so that they are ready for you to
read them. Your handheld notifies you of new messages by blinking an indicator
light, beeping, or vibrating. The handheld also displays a visual list of
notifications, called the Attention Manager.
Receiving e-mail notification
When a new message arrives in your account, by default your handheld beeps and
notifies you of the new e-mail’s arrival. The beep or alert sound your hear is called
a notification. Your handheld also notifies you of a new message’s arrival by
blinking an indicator light or vibrating if the right preferences are turned on. For
more information, see “Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new
e-mail” later in this chapter.
NOTE The Notification option is turned on by default. If the handheld does not notify
you when new messages are received, check whether the Notification option is
turned on. See “Setting notification options” later in this chapter for more
information.
Viewing and using the Attention Manager
The handheld also displays an Attention Manager that shows summary
information about new e-mail messages and alerts from other applications, such as
alerts to remind you of Date Book appointments.
Envelope icons
indicate whether a
message or
subject has been
downloaded, and
whether there are
any attachments
Sh
ows unrea
d/
total messages
Displays the time for
messages received today
and the date for all other
messages
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
172
To view the Attention Manager:
■Tap the blinking asterisk in the upper-left corner of any screen.
If you are using the VersaMail application and you receive new e-mail messages,
they filter into the Inbox. As you work with e-mail messages in the Inbox, the
Attention Manager doesn’t display a reminder for any new messages that arrive
because the messages are already displayed in the Inbox.
NOTE A broken envelope icon appears next to a message when an e-mail was not
successfully downloaded. To retrieve the e-mail, you can either tap the reminder in
the Attention Manager or tap Get Mail in the VersaMail application.
To respond to the reminders, do one of the following:
■Tap the check box to clear a reminder from the list.
NOTE Clearing a reminder only removes it from the Attention Manager. It does
not delete the message from the VersaMail application.
■Tap the reminder (either the mail icon or the text description) to open and read
the e-mail message in the appropriate account’s Inbox.
■Tap Done to close the Attention Manager and return to whatever you were
doing on your handheld before the Attention Manager appeared.
■Tap Snooze to see the list again in five minutes.
■Tap Clear All to dismiss all reminders in the Attention Manager.
Setting notification options
You can turn the notification sound on or off to determine which messages trigger
an alert.
To set notification options:
1. Press the VersaMail button on your handheld.
2. Tap the Menu icon .
3. Tap Options.
4. Tap Notification.
Tap the check box to
remove a single
reminder from the
list
The mail icon tells
you that this
reminder is for an
e-mail message
Tap the text to open
the e-mail message
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
173
5. Tap the Notify me of new mail and mail alerts check box.
6. Tap OK.
Changing the notification sound
You can choose from a variety of sounds, such as birds, bumble bees, or simply an
alarm, to notify you when new e-mail is received.
1. Tap the Menu icon .
2. Tap Options.
3. Tap Notification.
4. Tap the Notify Sound pick list and select a sound. The handheld plays a brief
demonstration of the sound.
With the sound turned off, the indicator light goes on or the handheld vibrates
if you selected one of those options (see the next section).
5. Tap OK.
Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail
You can select how your handheld notifies you of new e-mail by setting the Alarm
preferences. These preferences are set in your handheld’s General preferences.
To make your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail:
1. Tap the Home icon .
2. Tap the Preferences icon .
FS9
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
174
3. Tap the Preferences pick list in the upper-right corner, and then tap General.
4. Do either or both of the following:
– To change the volume of the Alarm Sound, tap the Alarm Sound pick list,
and then tap Low, Medium, High, or Off.
– To change whether or not the handheld vibrates when you receive new
e-mail, tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list, and then tap On or Off.
5. Press the VersaMail button on your handheld.
Creating a notification filter for e-mail you receive
You can create and use a notification filter to limit the e-mail messages that trigger
an alert from your handheld. The notification filter doesn’t filter the e-mail
messages themselves, just the notification—all messages are still delivered.
For example, when you travel you may want to be alerted only to e-mail regarding
a specific project. You can create a notification filter that alerts you when e-mail
that meets these conditions arrives.
NOTE Although the notification filter alerts you when e-mail that meets the filter
criteria arrives, all other e-mail messages are also received. You don’t receive a
notification for other messages, however. If you want to receive only specific e-mail
messages, you can create mail filters. See “Creating mail filters” for more
information.
To create or edit a notification filter:
1. Tap the Menu icon .
2. Tap Options.
3. Tap Notification.
4. Tap Filter.
5. Tap Edit.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
175
6. Use the pick lists to create criteria for the notification filter.
The two pick lists and the edit line combine to create a statement that identifies
the type of e-mail that triggers notification. For example, a filter might read, “If
the [From] [Contains] mweston@example.com, Then Notify Me.”
You can also use the And button to create a more complex statement, such as “If
the [From] [Contains] mweston@example.com, And if the [Subject] [Starts with]
Apollo Project, Then Notify Me.”
When you use this notification filter, only e-mail matching these conditions
prompts a notification alert on your handheld.
7. Tap OK.
Scheduled retrieval of e-mail
You can set up the VersaMail application to automatically search for new mail on
a regular schedule for a given e-mail account. When setting up a schedule, you
select the interval for retrieving mail, the start and end time for retrieving mail, and
the days on which scheduled e-mail retrieval should take place.
You can set up different schedules for each of your e-mail accounts, but you can
only set up one schedule for a given account. For example, if you set up a schedule
for mail retrieval on weekdays for your Yahoo account, you cannot set up a
separate schedule for weekends on the same account.
To Select the header field with the information contained in the
edit line: To, From, Subject.
Contains Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does not contain.
Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For
example, if you want to be notified only of e-mail where the
Subject is the Apollo Project, enter “Apollo Project.”
Add Use to further refine the notification criteria by linking two
conditions together. Tap Add, and then select criteria from the
To and Contains pick lists. Enter the text that must be found in
the header field in the Edit line.
Tap to remove the current
notification filter
Set the filter criteria
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
176
Scheduled retrieval of e-mail downloads the first 3KB of each message. If a
message is larger than 3KB, tap the More button on the message screen to
download and view the entire message.
Scheduled retrieval of e-mail recognizes any filter criteria you have set up for
downloading messages to your handheld. See “Managing mail filters” later in this
chapter for information. Any messages that do not meet the filter criteria will not
be downloaded during scheduled e-mail retrieval. To retrieve messages that do not
conform to filter criteria, perform a manual Get with all filters turned off.
If a message is downloaded during scheduled e-mail retrieval but is not deleted
from the mail server, the message will not be downloaded again for a 30-day
period. If, after 30 days, the message is still on the mail server, it will be
downloaded during the next scheduled e-mail retrieval. However, messages
remaining on the mail server after a scheduled e-mail retrieval will be downloaded
to the handheld during a manual Get.
If scheduled e-mail retrieval is taking place and you turn your handheld off or the
network connection is disconnected, the retrieval fails. If you are attempting a
scheduled retrieval over an 802.11b network, you must be in range of an 802.11b
hub for scheduled retrieval to work.
If more than one scheduled retrieval of e-mail takes place at the same time (for
example, for two different e-mail accounts), the retrievals take place in the
following order:
■Any past-due retrieval (for example, a retry of an earlier failed retrieval)
■Current retrievals in order according to the order or e-mail accounts (#1, #2, and
so on)
NOTE Scheduled retrieval of e-mail is not supported for VPN or SSL connections. It
is also not supported if you have configured TealLock to encrypt databases on your
handheld. If you try to set up scheduled e-mail retrieval for a non-supported
connection type, an error message appears.
Scheduled mail retrieval notifications
If scheduled retrieval of e-mail takes place over an 802.11b network using the built-
in 802.11b radio on your handheld, you will not see any status messages during
retrieval. If scheduled mail retrieval takes place over any other type of connection
(for example, using a Palm Bluetooth Card inserted into your handheld’s card
expansion slot), a series of status messages appears during the connection and mail
retrieval process.
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
177
If scheduled retrieval of e-mail discovers and downloads new messages for a given
e-mail account, a notification appears in the Attention Manager displaying the
account name and the number of new messages. If retrieval is scheduled for more
than one account, a separate notification appears for each account.
Tap the notification to go to the Inbox of that account, or launch the VersaMail
application and go to that account. Once you view a message in the Inbox it is
removed from the Attention Manager notification, even if you do not open the
message. Scheduled retrieval then starts at the next scheduled interval with the
Attention Manager counter reset to 1. If you do not view the Inbox of the selected
account and another scheduled e-mail retrieval takes place and finds new
messages, the Attention Manager will add the number of new messages to the
notification for that account. For example, if schedule retrieval #1 finds two new
messages and, before you view the Inbox, scheduled retrieval #2 takes place and
finds three more new messages, the Attention Manager notification indicates five
new messages for that account.
If scheduled retrieval of e-mail discovers new messages but then fails for any
reason, a notification appears in the Attention Manager displaying the account
name and an error message.
You can tap the error message or open the VersaMail application to the given
account for more detailed information on the failed schedule retrieval.
FLOW
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
178
If scheduled retrieval of e-mail discovers no new messages for a given account, no
notifications appear in the Attention Manager for that account.
The Attention Manager displays only the most recent notification for a given
account. For example, if one scheduled retrieval of messages failed, but the next
one succeeded and downloaded two new messages, the Attention Manager would
first display the error message, but would display the number of messages
retrieved after the successful retrieval.
Attention Manager notifications are specific for each account. For example, if
schedule retrieval fails for one account but succeeds in downloading new
messages for a different account, the Attention Manager displays an error message
for the first account and a message indicating the number of messages
downloaded for the second account.
To set up scheduled retrieval of e-mail messages:
1. On the message screen, press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options.
3. Select Auto Get Mail
FLOW
NEW SCREEN
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
179
4. Select the Get mail automatically check box.
5. Set schedule options:
6. Tap OK.
7. (Optional) Tap Get Mail or HotSync. You should perform a manual Get Mail or
HotSync operation after setting up scheduled retrieval of e-mail. This ensures
that only new messages will be retrieved during scheduled e-mail retrieval.
Scheduled e-mail retrieval retries
If the interval for scheduled retrieval of e-mail is set at “Every 1 hour” or less
frequently, and a scheduled retrieval fails for any reason, the VersaMail application
will continue attempting to retrieve e-mail at 30-minute intervals until either the
next scheduled retrieval of e-mail occurs or the end time for scheduled e-mail
Interval Tap the Every pick list and select the time interval, from
15 minutes to 12 hours. See “Cost issues with scheduled
e-mail retrieval” for information on setting the interval.
Start Time Tap the Start Time box, tap to enter the start time hour and
minute, and tap to enter AM or PM. Tap OK.
End Time Tap the End Time box, tap to enter the end time hour and
minute, and tap to enter AM or PM. Tap OK.
Days Tap days schedule will be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can only set up one schedule per a
given e-mail account.
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
180
retrieval is reached. If the interval is set for more frequently than one hour and a
scheduled e-mail retrieval fails, the VersaMail application waits until the next
scheduled retrieval of e-mail.
Cost issues with scheduled e-mail retrieval
If your network provider charges a service fee, using scheduled retrieval of e-mail
can substantially add to your monthly charges. This issue is especially noticeable
for POP accounts, because the size of the IDs used to locate POP account messages
is much larger (and thus takes longer to read) than for IMAP accounts. To minimize
monthly charges, set your interval for scheduled e-mail retrieval to no more
frequently than once per hour. If you set the interval as more frequently than once
per hour, an alert message appears.
Inbox icons in the VersaMail application
The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox indicate the message’s status.
Reading e-mail
To read e-mail, tap the e-mail message in the Inbox or the folder where the message
is located.
Alternately, you can use the navigator for one-hand message viewing.
Only the subject header information is downloaded.
Only the subject header and attachment information are downloaded.
Part or all of the message text is downloaded.
Part or all of the message text and attachment information is
downloaded.
FLOW
Tap to read
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
181
To read a message using the navigator:
1. Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the message you want to read.
2. Press Select to select the message, and then press Select again to open the
message.
3. After reading the message, press Select to close the message.
If you chose to get messages by subjects only, tap the More button to view the
body of the e-mail message, plus any attachments. See “Getting e-mail by subject
or getting the entire message” earlier in this chapter.
If you chose to get entire messages, the body of the e-mail message is displayed.
However, if the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only
a partial message is displayed. Tap the More button to view the entire message.
Plain text and HTML e-mail
By default, the VersaMail application is set to receive mail in HTML format. This
means that any e-mail messages sent as HTML will be displayed on your handheld
with basic HTML formatting intact, including the following:
■Boldface
■Italics
■Underlining
■Colored words
■Bullet lists
■Numbered lists
■Line breaks
Formatting not displayed (for example, certain types of graphics) is received as an
attachment that can be downloaded and viewed.
When you set the VersaMail application to receive e-mail messages as HTML, any
messages sent as plain text will be displayed as plain text only. You can also set the
application to receive all messages as plain text only, regardless of the format in
which they were sent. If you choose this option, only the text of any messages sent
in HTML format will be displayed. See “Setting preferences for getting and
Tap More to view the entire
message
MORE
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
182
deleting e-mail” later in this chapter for instructions on choosing to receive e-mail
in HTML or plain text format.
NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, even if you
are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally sent as HTML.
Viewing other folders
When you get new e-mail, it appears in the account’s Inbox folder. You can move
an e-mail message from one folder to another and then view it in the destination
folder.
To view other folders:
1. Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
2. Tap the folder you want to view.
Managing display options in the folder’s list view
You can customize the way in which messages appear in the list view of your mail
folders. The options you choose apply to all folders.
The display options you can customize, and the default settings, are as follows:
Option Default
Sort by Date
Sort order Descending
Summary view Two-line view
Summary view columns Sender, Date, Subject
Font Palm 9
Unread message color Black
Read message color Black
Available folders
SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
183
To change the sort order:
1. Tap Display.
2. Tap the Sort by pick list, and then tap the column name.
3. Tap Descend or Ascend to change the sort order.
To select a one-line or two-line view:
1. Tap Display
2. Tap the Show pick list, and then tap the view you want.
To display or hide a column in a folder’s list view:
1. Tap Display.
2. Tap the check box for each column that you want to show. The column options
will change depending on whether you choose a one-line or a two-line view.
NOTE If you select Date, the Date column displays the message time for any
messages received today—that is, any message received after 12:01 A.M.
Otherwise, the Date column shows the date the message was received.
FLOW
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
184
To change the font:
1. Tap Display.
2. Tap the font pick list, and then tap the font you want.
To select colors for read and unread mail:
1. Tap Display.
2. Tap the Unread pick list, and then tap the color you want to use to display
unread messages.
3. Tap the Read pick list, and then the color you want to use to display read
messages.
In the list view itself, you can also change the size of the columns.
FLOW
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
185
To change the size of a column in the folder’s list view:
NOTE Changing column size is available for one-line message view only.
1. Tap and hold the stylus on the column divider.
2. Drag the column divider to change the width of the column.
You can also change the font within an individual message. This change affects the
selected message only.
To change the font of a message:
1. On the message screen, press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options.
3. Tap Font
4. Tap the Message Font pick list and select the font you want.
Drag the column
divider left or right to
make the column
narrower or wider
FLOW
NEW SCREEN
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
186
Moving e-mail between folders
You can move one or more e-mail messages between folders.
To move one e-mail message:
1. Press Right on the navigator to move to and open the folders pick list in the
upper-right corner of the screen. Press Up or Down to move to the folder you
want, and the press Select to select the folder.
Alternately, tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and
then tap the folder name.
2. Tap the icon to the left of the message, press Right on the navigator to open the
Message menu, press Down to move to the Move To option, and then press
Select to select this option.
Alternately, tap the icon to the left of the message, and then tap Move To from
the pop-up menu.
The folders pick list appears.
3. Press Up or Down on the navigator to move to the folder you want, and then
press Select to select the folder.
SHOW
SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
187
Alternately, tap the folder that you want.
TIP You can also move a single e-mail message from within the body of the message
by pressing Command , tapping the folder icon, and selecting the destination
folder from the pick list. See “Using the command bar” later in this chapter for more
information on the command bar.
To move multiple e-mail messages:
1. Tap the folder that contains the e-mail messages you want to move.
2. Select the messages by tapping to the left of each message icon.
TIP To select a group of adjacent messages, drag the stylus to the left of the
message icons.
A checkmark appears next to the selected messages.
SHOW
SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
188
3. Do one of the following:
– Press Command + V (alternately, press Function + Menu ), and
then select Move To on the Message menu.
– Tap a message icon next to a selected message, and then tap Move To on the
pick list.
4. Tap the folders pick list, and select a destination folder.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Creating and editing mail folders
You can also create new folders so that you can store e-mail messages by subject,
person, or project. The VersaMail application has certain existing folders, such as
Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, and Trash.
The procedure for creating and editing folders varies slightly between POP and
IMAP e-mail accounts, as described in the following procedure.
SHOW
SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
189
To create and edit e-mail folders:
1. Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then tap Edit
Folders.
2. On the Edit Folders or Edit IMAP Folders screen, select any of the following:
– To create a new folder, tap New, and then enter the new folder name. For
IMAP accounts only, select the check box if you also want to create the folder
on the server. When finished, press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
– To rename a folder, tap the folder name from the list on the screen, tap
Rename, and then enter the new folder name. For IMAP accounts only, you
have the option of deleting the folder on the server. Select the check box if
you also want to rename the folder on the server. When finished, press
Function + Enter , or tap OK.
POP
accounts
IMAP
accounts
POP
accounts
IMAP
accounts
POP
accounts
IMAP
accounts
POP
accounts
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
190
– To delete a folder, tap the folder name from the list on the screen, and then
tap Delete. For IMAP accounts only, you have the option of deleting the
folder on the server. Select the check box if you also want to delete the folder
on the server, and then press Function + Enter , or tap OK. For POP
accounts, the folder will be deleted immediately and you will not see a
confirmation screen.
Creating and sending new e-mail
When you create a new e-mail message, you can enter the person’s e-mail address
or use the Lookup screen to find a particular address.
To create a new e-mail message:
1. Press Command + N.
Alternately, tap New.
2. Enter the recipient’s name using one of the methods described in the next
procedures.
NOTE When you address a message to several recipients, you do not see all the
recipients on the To list because the list is truncated on the To line. If you tap the To
field, a dialog box shows all recipients for the current message.
Delete confirmation
appears for IMAP
accounts only
SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
191
Addressing a message by typing the address
You can address a message by entering the complete address.
To enter the address:
1. In the New Message screen, tap or navigate to the To field and enter the address,
and then tap Done.
For multiple recipients, type a semicolon (;) and then a space between recipient
names. The To field will expand to two lines during address entry for addresses
longer than the one-line display.
After address entry, addresses longer than one line will be shown on a single
line followed by an ellipsis.
Alternately, in the New Message screen, tap the word To and enter the address
on the Recipient List screen, and then tap Done. Use the shortcut buttons at the
bottom of the screen for quick address entry.
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
192
For multiple recipients, type a semicolon (;) or tap the semicolon button at the
bottom of the screen, and then type a space between recipient names.
NOTE If you enter a comma instead of a semicolon, it is automatically changed
to a semicolon. If you enter a space with no punctuation between names,
semicolons are not inserted and the e-mail message is improperly addressed.
If you want to edit an e-mail address that is longer than the line provided in the
New Message screen, tap the To field and edit the address.
2. To send copies, tap cc: or bcc: and enter the recipient’s address.
Copies (cc:) allow recipients to see the addresses of the other recipients, but
addresses in the blind copies (bcc:) field are hidden from all other recipients.
TIP To automatically fill in the address as you type, see “Using Smart
Addressing to address a message” later in this chapter.
Addressing a message using Address Book
You can enter a recipient’s address by using the Lookup screen to select the
address. The names and addresses in the Lookup screen come from Address Book.
To use an address from Address Book:
1. In the New Message screen, tap the word To.
2. On the Recipient List screen, tap Lookup.
3. On the Address Lookup screen, tap the address you want, and then tap Add. To
add multiple addresses,
(QUERY: How do you make multiple selection from the Address Lookup
screen?)
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
193
4. Tap Add.
5. To enter an address in the cc: or bcc: field, tap the field name and follow the
steps given for the To field.
Using Smart Addressing to address a message
Smart Addressing types ahead and completes a recognized e-mail address. Smart
addressing automatically fills in fields when the recipient’s name and e-mail
address are in your Address Book.
By default, Smart Addressing is selected in VersaMail Preferences.
To use Smart Addressing to address a message:
1. In the New Message screen, tap the word To.
2. Start entering the person’s name, such as Joe Smith.
Once the name is recognized from your Address Book, the name and e-mail
address are automatically completed on the recipient list. For example, if you
have a Joe Smith and a Joan Smith in your Address Book (and no other names
starting with J), once you type “Joe,” the entry “Joe Smith” is completed with
the correct e-mail address.
3. If the recognized name has more than one e-mail address associated with it, all
of the e-mail addresses are displayed. Navigate or tap to select the e-mail
address you want.
4. Tap Done.
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
194
Turning Smart Addressing on or off
You can turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences. By default,
Smart Addressing is turned on.
To turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences:
1. In the Inbox, press Command + R.
Alternately, in the Inbox, press Function + Menu , tap Options, and
then tap Preferences.
2. Tap Advanced.
3. Tap the Enable Smart Addressing check box if it is not selected. A checkmark
means it is turned on.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Composing and sending e-mail
After you enter your recipient addresses, you can compose the rest of the e-mail
message.
To compose the rest of the e-mail and send it:
1. Tap the Subject field and enter the subject of your e-mail.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
195
2. Tap the area below the Subject line and enter the text of your e-mail.
To access the editing features available on the Edit menu, press Function +
Menu . The first character of each sentence is automatically capitalized for
you.
3. (Optional) Press Command + A (alternately, tap the Options menu and
select Add Attachments). See “Attaching files to e-mail” later in this chapter.
4. Tap one of the following to send the e-mail:
TIP You can also tap Save To Drafts from the Options menu (or press
Command + W) to save this message in the Drafts folder rather than
sending it.
Send retry
(QUERY: Is background send automatic? In the 10/16 flow, there is a
dialog screen stating the manual send failed, and asking the user if they
want to perform background send. This contradicts the PRD/FRD, which
says background send happens automatically. The sections in this doc are
written according to the PRD/FRD.)
When you tap Send on the message menu, the VersaMail application automatically
attempts to send the message. If the send attempt fails for any reason (your
handheld is out of range, the application cannot connect to the mail server), the
application moves the message to the Outbox and continues to try to send the
message at 30-minute intervals, for up to three attempts. You do not need to set up
or do anything for automatic send retry to occur.
Send Sends the e-mail immediately. (Alternately, press
Command + Y.)
Outbox Stores e-mail in the Outbox so you can compose e-mail offline
and then send all e-mail during one connection with the
server. To send your e-mail later, go to the Outbox and tap Get
& Send. The connection to the mail server is truncated and all
the e-mail in the Outbox is delivered.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
196
If you put a message in the Outbox, you must perform a manual send to send the
message on the first attempt. The VersaMail application attempts automatic send
retry only after a manual send attempt fails.
NOTE Scheduled retrieval of e-mail is not supported for VPN or SSL connections, or
for accounts for which your ISP requires you to log in to the mail server before
sending mail. It is also not supported if you have configured TealLock to encrypt
databases on your handheld.
Send retry notifications
If automatic send retry fails after the third attempt, a notification appears in the
Attention Manager. A separate notification appears for each e-mail account for
which a send retry occurs.
Tap the notification or open the account in the VersaMail application to view a
detailed error message.
Viewing the error message deletes the notification from the Attention Manager.
The Attention Manager only shows the most recent notification for a given e-mail
account, no matter how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that
account.
NOTE If you perform a soft reset during automatic send retry, the retry cancels. You
must manually send any messages in the Outbox after the soft reset.
Modifying messages in the Outbox
A message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited,
moved, or deleted. However, if you edit the message, you will need to perform a
manual send in order to send the message. If the manual send fails, the message
will be stored in the Outbox to await the next automatic send retry.
FLOW
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
197
During automatic send retry, any message that the VersaMail application is
attempting to send is in a locked state and cannot be edited, moved, or deleted. If
you try to modify a message in the locked state, an error message appears.
If a send retry fails after the third attempt, the message is stored in the Outbox in
the error state. You can send the message again manually, or edit, move, or delete
the message. However, if you edit the message, you will need to perform a manual
send in order to send the message. If the manual send fails, the message will be
stored in the Outbox to await the next automatic send retry.
See the following section “Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications” for icons
that indicate messages awaiting the next automatic send retry as well as messages
in the locked and error state.
Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications
The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox indicate the message’s status.
Completing drafts
If you are composing an e-mail message and you exit the VersaMail application
before tapping Outbox, Send, or Cancel, the e-mail automatically moves to the
Drafts folder. To finish editing the e-mail, tap the folders pick list and select Drafts.
Select the e-mail you want to complete or edit, and tap Edit. You can also delete the
e-mail in the Drafts folder.
Attaching a personal signature
You can include a personal signature, such as your name, e-mail address, and
telephone number, with each e-mail you send.
NEW
ICON Message has been placed in the Outbox by the user and must be
manually sent.
NEW
ICON Manual send failed; message has been placed in the Outbox
automatically and is waiting for next send retry.
NEW
ICON Send retry currently in process; you cannot edit, move, or delete
message in this state.
NEW
ICON Send retry failed after third attempt; you can work with this message
as with any other message.
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
198
To create a personal signature:
1. Press Command + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , tap Options, and then tap
Preferences.
2. Tap Signature.
3. Tap the Attach Signature check box to select it.
4. Enter your signature information.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Forwarding e-mail
You can quickly forward e-mail messages from any folder other than the Outbox
folder.
To forward e-mail:
1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e-mail.
2. Tap the e-mail message to display it.
3. Press Command + F.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
199
Alternately, tap the Forward button.
4. Tap the word To.
5. On the Recipient List screen, enter or look up the recipient address. See the
procedure for creating new e-mail earlier in this chapter for more information
on addressing messages.
6. (Optional) Enter some text describing the forwarded message.
7. Press Command + Y (alternately, tap Send) to send the message, or tap
Outbox to store it in the Outbox.
NOTE Forwarded messages always send as text only, even if you received the
original message in HTML format.
Replying to e-mail
You can reply to an e-mail as you are reading it, or start the reply when viewing
messages in the folders list view.
To reply to an e-mail that you are reading:
1. Tap the e-mail you want to reply to.
2. Press Command + O.
Tap Forward
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
200
Alternately, tap Reply.
3. In the Reply Options dialog box, select options for replying to the sender only
or to all e-mail recipients, and for including original message text.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
5. Enter a reply.
6. Press Command + Y (alternately, tap Send) to send the message, or tap
Outbox to send it later.
NOTE Replied-to messages always send as text only, even if you received the
original message in HTML format.
To reply to an e-mail from the folders list:
1. On the message screen, press Right on the navigator to move to and open the
Options menu.
2. Press Down on the navigator to move to the Reply option, and then press Select
to select this option.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
201
TIP Alternately, you can tap the folders pick list, select the folder that contains
the e-mail, tap the envelope icon next to the message, and then tap Reply on
the pick list.
3. In the Reply Options dialog box, select options for replying to the sender only
or to all e-mail recipients, and for including original message text.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
The e-mail is addressed.
5. Enter a reply.
6. Press Command + Y (alternately, tap Send) to send the message, or tap
Outbox to send it later.
NOTE Replied-to messages always send as text only, even if you received the
original message in HTML format.
SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
202
Working with URLs
You can click on a URL in a received message to view the web page or file
associated with the URL. Clicking the URL opens a browser window (using the
default browser on your handheld) to view the page or file.
Depending on whether the received message is displayed in HTML or plain text
format, URLs will appear in slightly different forms, as follows:
Messages displayed in HTML format contain the name of any image file URL that
was included in the sent message, indicated in angle brackets as follows:
<image.jpg not shown>. Clicking anywhere within the angle brackets opens a
browser window to display the image file associated with the URL.
Working with attachments
You can easily download, view, and send attachments with e-mail messages.
Downloading attachments to your handheld
At times e-mail contains attached files, such as Microsoft Word or text files, that
you want to view or install on your handheld. You can download and work with
the following attached files:
HTML URLs appear as blue underlined text
Plain text URLs appear as any text beginning with “http://” or “www.”
vCard (.vcf) This is an address.
vCal (.vcs) This is usually a calendar appointment or a To Do task.
Text (.txt) This is usually a memo or another plain text file.
Voice Memo (.???) You can listen to downloaded Voice Memos using the VoicePad
application on your handheld.
HTML (.html or
.htm) Usually a web page or a formatted text file. By default, the
VersaMail application strips the formatting and shows only the
text of most HTML attachments. However, some browsers
allow other applications to pass them a file for viewing in full
HTML. If your browser supports this function, you can view
HTML attachments with all formatting intact. You do not need
to do anything different in the steps for downloading and
viewing attachments; the attachment is automatically opened
in the correct format for your handheld (text only or full
HTML) based on the applications you have installed.
Microsoft Word
(.doc) The formatting is stripped and shows the text of most
Microsoft Word documents is shown.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
203
Among the types of attachments you can receive are the following handheld
application files:
■Address Book entries
■Date Book appointments
■To Do list items
■Text and Voice Memos
You can also save downloaded files—including files contained in a compressed
ZIP file—to an expansion card. See “Saving attachments to an expansion card”
later in this chapter for information.
NOTE The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text
and 2MB total, including attachments. If the attachment is too large, it cannot be
downloaded to the handheld.
JPEG files (.jpg These are graphics files. You can download these files and view
them using the PhotoBase application on your handheld.
Other application
files For other types of application files, your handheld may contain
a viewer that allows other applications to pass it a file for
viewing. For example, your handheld may contain an image
viewer that allows another application to pass it a GIF
attachment for viewing. You do not need to do anything
different in the steps for downloading and viewing
attachments; if your handheld contains such a viewer, the
attachment is automatically opened. If your handheld does not
contain such a viewer, you cannot view the attachment. Among
the file types that may be supported are GIF, MP3, WAV, and
AAC files.
PRC (.prc) This is a Palm OS® application that you can install and run on
your handheld.
PDB (.pdb) This is a file that works with specific Palm™ applications.
ZIP (.zip) These are compressed files that contain other types of files, for
example, text files or Word docs. You can download and
uncompress (“unzip”) a ZIP file, then view the contents on
your handheld.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
204
To download an attachment:
1. In the Inbox, tap the message with the attachment.
A paper clip icon appears on the message’s icon if the message has an
attachment that has been downloaded.
If you choose to get messages by subject only, you must tap More for each
downloaded message in order to view the body of the e-mail message plus any
attachments.
If the option Download Attachments is selected in the VersaMail Preferences,
any attachments that do not cause the message to exceed the maximum
message size are downloaded. Otherwise, you see a message showing that the
attachments were too large and asking if you would like to continue
downloading them.
For example, if the maximum message size is 5KB and you download a body of
2KB, then any attachment under 3KB is also downloaded, and any attachment
over 3KB is not. See “Downloading large attachments” later in this chapter.
If an attachment is not downloaded, the message will not show a paper clip icon
in the Inbox even though it was sent with an attachment.
2. Click the paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. If the attachment is not
downloaded, a paper clip icon will not appear even though the message was
sent with an attachment. You must download the attachment for the paper clip
icon to appear.
Paper clip icon
indicates
downloaded
attachment SHOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
205
3. Your options for working with a downloaded attachment vary according to the
file type.
4. When you have finished viewing or installing the attachment, tap Done. This
returns you to the Attachments dialog box, where you can select another
attachment if you want to.
5. When you have finished viewing or installing all attachments, tap Done on the
Attachments dialog box. This returns you to the Message screen.
Type Action
Viewable file:
text, Word doc,
To Do task, HTML,
graphic, and so on
Tap the name of the attachment you want to view, and then
tap View. If there are multiple viewers registered on your
handheld for the attachment file type, either use the default
viewer shown, or select a viewer from the list. If there is
only one viewer registered for the attachment file type, the
list does not appear.
Palm application
or database file
(.prc or .pdb)
Tap the name of the attachment you want, and then tap
Install. The file installs automatically.
Compressed ZIP
file Tap the name of the attachment you want, and then tap
Unzip. The file uncompresses, and the files it contains are
listed. Tap the name of the file you want to view or install,
and then tap View or Install.
T
ap paper c
li
p
i
con to v
i
ew
attachment
Viewer pick list is displayed only if handheld has
multiple viewers registered for attachment file
type
Button displays View, Install, or
Unzip depending on the
attachment file type
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
206
Downloading large attachments
Downloading and viewing a message with a single attachment that exceeds your
maximum message size, or a message with multiple attachments whose total size
exceeds your maximum message size, requires some extra steps.
To determine if a message has an attachment or multiple attachments that exceed the
maximum message size:
■In the Inbox, tap the message title.
If the message plus attachments exceeds the maximum message size, the More
button appears on the Message screen. In the case of multiple attachments, if
some of the attachments were downloaded completely, you see both the paper clip
icon (indicating fully downloaded attachments) and the More button (indicating
incompletely downloaded attachments).
To download a single attachment that exceeds the maximum message size:
1. Tap the More button.
2. Tap No to stop downloading and return to the Message screen.
More button indicates that message
plus any attachments exceeds
maximum message size
MORE
Tap More
MORE
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
207
Tap Yes to continue downloading the entire message with attachment.
3. (Optional) Tap Cancel to stop downloading and return to the Message screen.
When downloading is complete, the paper clip icon appears and the More button
is no longer displayed. Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented
earlier in this chapter.
To download multiple attachments whose total size exceeds the maximum message size:
1. Tap the paper clip icon.
2. Select one of the following:
– To return to the Message screen, tap Cancel.
– To view any fully downloaded attachments without continuing to download
additional attachments, tap No.
Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented earlier in this
chapter.
– To continue downloading all messages, tap Yes.
3. (Optional) Tap Cancel to stop downloading and return to the Message screen.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
208
When downloading is complete, the Attachments dialog box appears, showing all
downloaded messages. Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented
earlier in this chapter.
Saving attachments to an expansion card
If you have purchased an expansion card that provides extra memory, you can save
downloaded attachments to the expansion card.
To save an attachment to an expansion card:
1. Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld.
2. Follow the procedure for downloading attachments described earlier in this
chapter.
3. On the Attachments screen, tap Save to Card.
4. Tap OK.
Attaching files to e-mail
You can attach files on your handheld to e-mail messages you send. For example,
you can attach files from the various handheld applications, such as any Date Book
appointment (.vcs), To Do List tasks (.vcs), text memos (.txt), or Voice Memos (???).
NOTE The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and 2MB
total, including attachments. The maximum number of attachments for any e-mail is
ten, regardless of the attachments’ total size.
You can attach the following types of files:
■vCard (.vcf)
■vCal (.vcs)
■Memo/Text (.txt)
■Voice Memo (???)
■PRC (.prc)
■PDB (.pdb)
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
209
To attach a file to a message:
1. Press Command + A.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , tap Options, and then tap Add
Attachment.
2. Tap the Type pick list and select the file type.
All files of the selected type appear in the Type box. For example, if you select
Appointments (vCal), tap Date Book to see a list of appointments from a
particular date that you can attach, or tap To Do to see To Do List tasks.
3. Tap the file that you want to attach, and then tap Add.
Select type of file you want to
attach
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
210
The selected file appears in the Attachments box.
4. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to for each attachment you want to add, and then tap Done.
TIP To delete an attachment from an e-mail message, tap the attached file in
the Attachments box and then tap Delete.
5. Tap Send or Outbox.
Uploading files from an expansion card
If you have purchased an expansion card and have saved files to the card, you can
upload files to attach to an e-mail message you are sending. Among the types of
files you can upload from an expansion card are the following:
■Word docs
■HTML files
■JPEG and GIF graphics files
■MP3 and WAV audio files
■AAC files
To upload an attachment from an expansion card:
1. Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld.
2. On the New Message screen, tap the Menu icon .
3. Tap Options.
4. Tap Add Attachment.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
211
5. Tap the From pick list and select Files on Card.
6. Tap the Type pick list and select the file type.
Only file types that correspond to the types of files on the card will be displayed
on the list. For example, if he card contains only Word docs and Address Book
entries, only the file types “doc” and “vCard” will be listed. You can select a
particular file type, or select All Files to view all files on the card.
7. Tap the file that you want to attach, and then tap Add.
PICK LIST
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
212
The selected file appears in the Attachments box.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each attachment you want to add, and then tap Done.
TIP To delete an attachment from an e-mail message, tap the attached file in
the Attachments box and then tap Delete.
9. Tap Send or Outbox.
Forwarding an attachment
You can include an attachments on any message you forward, up to the maximum
message size.
To forward a message with an attachment:
1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e-mail.
2. Tap the e-mail message to display it.
3. Press Command + F.
Alternately, tap the Forward button.
4. Tap the word To. On the Recipient List screen, enter or look up the recipient
address. See the procedure for creating e-mail earlier in this chapter for more
information on addressing messages.
5. Follow the steps for the procedure for attaching files presented earlier in this
chapter.
Deleting messages
You can delete one or more e-mail messages from any folder. For example, you can
delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the
Drafts folder. When you delete a message, it is placed in the Trash folder. See
“Emptying the trash” later in this chapter.
To delete messages on the server when you empty the trash on your handheld, you
can select the Delete Msgs on Server setting in VersaMail Preferences. If you don’t
periodically empty the trash and delete messages on the server, any incoming
e-mail may “bounce” back to the sender. See “Setting preferences for getting and
deleting e-mail” later in this chapter.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
213
To delete one or more messages:
1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the message you want
to delete.
2. Do one of the following:
3. Press Right on the navigator to move to and open the Message menu.
4. Press Down on the navigator to move to the Delete option, and then press Select
to delete the message.
TIP Alternately, you can tap the message icon next to a selected e-mail
message and then tap Delete, or press Function + Menu and then
select Delete.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
6. (Optional) Tap Also delete message on server if you want to delete the message
from the server now.
The selected messages move to the Trash folder and are deleted from your
handheld when you empty the trash. If you set the preference to automatically
empty the trash, the messages are deleted when the trash is emptied. By default,
the trash auto-empties all deleted e-mail older than one week. See “Emptying
the trash” later in this chapter for more information.
Item to delete Action
One message Tap the bullet next to the message’s icon.
Multiple
messages Tap the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want
to delete.
A group of
adjacent
messages
Drag the stylus along the left of the message icons. To select
another group, lift the stylus and select the next group of
messages.
If you selected the setting
Delete Msgs on Server in
VersaMail Preferences, this
check box is selected
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
214
IMPORTANT If you delete a message on the server, you cannot retrieve it and view it
again later.
To delete messages before a certain date:
1. Press press Function + Menu , and then tap Delete Old from the
Message menu.
2. Tap the Folder pick list and select the folder that contains the messages you
want to delete.
3. Tap the Older than pick list, and then tap One Week, One Month, or Choose
Date.
Displays the current
folder for deleting
messages PICK LIST
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
215
If you tap Choose Date, you can select a date from the calendar.
4. Tap Delete.
5. (Optional) Tap Also delete message on server if you want to delete the message
from the server now.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Emptying the trash
Deleted e-mail accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your
handheld. To increase memory, you should empty the trash regularly. If you want
to automatically empty the trash, you can set a preference to empty the trash
immediately or empty any e-mail older than a certain number of days.
To empty the trash:
1. Press Command + E.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Empty Trash from
the Message menu.
NOTE If Auto-Empty Mail from Trash is selected in VersaMail Preferences, a
message asks if you want to delete the trash.
Tap a date to select it,
or tap Today
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
216
2. (Optional) Tap Details to see how many messages are in the Trash, and whether
the messages are set to be deleted on the server.
3. If you want to delete messages from the handheld as well as from the server, tap
Both. A message asks if you want to update the server now.
To delete the message from only the handheld now, tap Handheld.
NOTE Many e-mail providers, such as Yahoo, have size restrictions for mail storage.
If your mailbox on the server becomes full, messages are returned to the senders.
To have the trash emptied automatically:
1. Press Command + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select
Preferences.
2. Tap Advanced.
By default, Auto-Empty Mail from Trash is selected, and the time interval is set
at Older Than 1 Week.
3. Tap the pick list, and select how often you want the e-mail messages
automatically emptied from the trash.
– Immediately.
– Older Than 1 Day.
– Older Than 3 Days.
– Older Than 1 Week.
– Older Than 1 Month.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
217
Marking messages as read or unread
You can mark messages as read or unread. When you tap a message to read it, it is
automatically marked as read.
To mark messages as read or unread:
1. Tap the folders pick list and select the folder you want.
2. Tap the icon next to the message you want to mark.
3. Tap Mark Read or tap Mark Unread.
TIP To mark multiple messages, tap the bullets next to the messages you
want, press Function + Menu and then select Mark Read or Mark
Unread.
4. Tap Handheld to mark the messages as read or unread on your handheld. Tap
Both to mark the messages on both the handheld and the server.
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
218
If you tap Both, this message appears.
Tap OK to connect with the server and immediately mark the messages as read
or unread on the server. This action also processes any other pending actions on
the server, such as messages not yet deleted.
Tap Cancel if you want the messages marked during the next HotSync
operation or the next time you connect to the server.
NOTE Because POP servers do not support the read or unread message
feature, the message is in bold or regular typeface for POP accounts on the
handheld, but you can’t connect with the server to change the message state.
Read messages appear in plain text; unread messages appear in bold text.
Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail
VersaMail Preferences determine how the VersaMail application gets, sends, and
deletes e-mail.
To set e-mail preferences:
1. Press Command + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select
Preferences.
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
219
2. Select preferences:
Get Enables you to retrieve the subject only or the entire
message.
Ask Every Time Displays a dialog box for choosing subjects only or entire
messages each time you retrieve e-mail. If deselected,
messages are retrieved according to the option you select in
the Get pick list.
Confirm
Deletions Displays a confirmation dialog before deleting e-mail.
Delete Msgs on
Server If selected, automatically deletes messages on the server that
you have deleted on your handheld. If not selected, you will
be asked each time you delete messages on your handheld
whether you want to also delete them on the server. Because
mailboxes on the server usually have size restrictions, we
recommend periodically deleting messages on the server.
Download
Attachments Causes files attached to e-mail to be automatically
downloaded to your handheld. Attachments that exceed the
maximum message size cannot be downloaded. See
“Working with attachments” earlier in this chapter for more
information.
Receive Format Enables you to retrieve messages in HTML format on in
plain text format. If you choose HTML, any messages sent to
you in HTML format will be displayed with basic HTML
formatting intact. Other messages will be displayed as plain
text. If you choose Plain Text, all messages will be displayed
as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were
sent. Default setting is HTML.
See “Working with URLs” earlier in this chapter for more
information on receiving e-mail in HTML format.
Signature Enables you to attach a default signature to all your outgoing
messages. See “Attaching a personal signature” earlier in
this chapter for more information.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
220
Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a message
You can add or update an e-mail address in the Address Book directly from the
body of a received e-mail message.
To add a new Address Book entry:
1. On the Message screen, press Function + Menu , select Options, and
then select Add to Address Book.
A dialog box appears with the “From” address displayed. If a Display Name
exists for this Address Book entry, the Last name and First name fields show the
display name.
2. (Optional) If the Last name and First name fields are blank, enter the first and
last name associated with the “From” e-mail address.
3. Tap OK to add the e-mail address to the Address Book, and then tap OK in the
confirmation dialog box.
You can also update an existing Address Book entry with a new e-mail address, or
create a second Address Book entry for a name that has an existing record. The
procedure is the same as for adding a new Address Book entry. If you tap Add to
Address Book from the body of an e-mail message and a record already exists for
the recipient name, you are prompted either to update the e-mail address for the
recipient or to create a new record for the recipient.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
221
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
To manage your e-mail on your desktop as well as on your handheld, you can
synchronize an e-mail account on the handheld with an e-mail application on the
desktop. You can use many popular e-mail applications, called clients, such as
Microsoft Outlook, Eudora, Lotus Notes, Outlook Express, or any other e-mail
clients that use MAPI.
You must have a Windows computer to synchronize e-mail between your
handheld and your computer.
This section describes the following:
■Starting the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit
■Configuring and activating accounts in the HotSync Manager
■Synchronizing e-mail on the handheld with a desktop e-mail application
■Converting attached files using attachment conversion plug-ins
Configuring an account in HotSync Manager
Before synchronizing an e-mail account, you configure the account’s settings in the
Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit. The settings have to be specified only once
unless you need to make changes.
To start Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
2. Select Custom.
3. Select VersaMail in the Conduit list.
4. Click Change.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
222
5. Select Synchronize Active Accounts.
6. (Optional) Select the check box Enable Informational Logging if you want the
HotSync log to record information, such as errors encountered, about the
conduit during a HotSync operation.
7. (Optional) Select the check box Set Selection As Default to make the current
settings the default settings for all accounts.
Setting synchronization options and account settings
Next, you must configure each e-mail account’s general synchronization settings.
For example, if you created an Earthlink e-mail account on the handheld and want
to synchronize that with the desktop, set the synchronization options for the
Earthlink account. During a HotSync operation, the Earthlink account on the
handheld and the e-mail application specified in the conduit are synchronized.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
223
To configure an account and set the synchronization options:
1. On the VersaMail Configuration For User ... screen, click the plus sign to the left
of the account you want to configure.
2. Under the account name, click Sync Client.
3. Select the option Check this box to synchronize this mail account when you
perform a HotSync operation; otherwise, the account cannot be synchronized.
Click plus sign
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
224
4. Click the Mail Client pick list and select the desktop e-mail application you will
use to synchronize the selected account with your handheld. For each
application, additional setup information is displayed in the Optional Setup
Notes box. See the following table for additional setup information for each
client.
TIP If your e-mail application is compatible with Extended MAPI, try Microsoft
Exchange 5.0 or later as a choice for the Mail Client option. If your e-mail
application is compatible with Simple MAPI (SMAPI), try Microsoft Outlook
Express as a choice for the Mail Client option. Although Netscape uses SMAPI,
Netscape is not supported.
(Optional) If prompted, enter profile and password information for the client
you selected.
IMPORTANT You must select the synchronize check box and select a mail client in
order to synchronize the account between your desktop and your handheld.
Mail Client Action
Microsoft
Exchange 5.0 or
later
Select a MAPI profile to access the mail server. The conduit
displays any existing MAPI profiles in the list.
Microsoft
Outlook 97 or
later
Select the MAPI profile to access the mail server. The conduit
checks for any existing MAPI profiles and displays them in the
list. Enter your password for Outlook. See “Configuring
Microsoft Outlook” later in this chapter for the changes you
need to make in Outlook.
Microsoft
Outlook Express
5.5 or later
If you select Microsoft Outlook Express, enter the password for
your e-mail account. See “Configuring Microsoft Outlook
Express” later in this chapter for details.
Lotus Notes Enter your Lotus Notes ID and password. Click Browse if you
need to locate your Notes ID.
Eudora 5.0 or
later See “Configuring Eudora” later in this chapter for more
information about the settings to make in Eudora.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
225
Direct POP
connection to
server
Select this option to synchronize an account by connecting
directly with a POP server. You must enter the information
about the server in the VersaMail application on your
handheld when you create the e-mail account to access the
server. You will enter information about the incoming (POP)
server, outgoing (SMTP) server, your e-mail username, your
password, and your e-mail address.
During the HotSync operation, the conduit reads the settings
you made. If the settings do not exist or all server information
is wrong, an error is reported in the HotSync.log file. However,
if the incoming server (POP) is correct, the Inbox is
synchronized if the option to synchronize the Inbox is selected.
If the outgoing server (SMTP) is correct, the Outbox is
synchronized (send e-mail) if you selected the option to
synchronize the Outbox. If neither is correct, then nothing
happens.
If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
APOP authentication, you must select the option to use APOP
on your handheld. See “Adding APOP to an account” later in
this chapter for details.
If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require
ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use
ESMTP on your handheld. See “Adding ESMTP to an account”
later in this chapter for details.
Direct IMAP
connection to
server
Select this option to synchronize an account by connecting
directly with an IMAP server. You must enter the information
about the server in the VersaMail application on your
handheld when you create the e-mail account to access the
server. You will enter information about the incoming (IMAP)
server, outgoing (SMTP) server, your e-mail username, your
password, and your e-mail address.
During the HotSync operation, the conduit reads the settings
you made. If the settings do not exist or all server information
is wrong, an error is reported in the HotSync.log file. However,
if the incoming server (IMAP) is correct, the Inbox is
synchronized if the option to synchronize the Inbox is selected.
If the outgoing server (SMTP) is correct, the Outbox is
synchronized (send e-mail) if you selected the option to
synchronize the Outbox. If neither is correct, then nothing
happens.
If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require
ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use
ESMTP on your handheld. See “Adding ESMTP to an account”
later in this chapter for details.
Mail Client Action
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
226
NOTE A profile contains configuration information, such as the location of
incoming e-mail, your personal address book, and other information services
that you can use. The profile may be MS Exchange Settings, your name, or
something different. For more information on profiles, see your e-mail
application’s documentation.
5. Under the account name, click Sync Options.
6. Enter the synchronization options you want:
–Maximum Message Size (KB) for HotSync Operation: Enter the maximum
message size from 1 to 2048KB. If the message exceeds the maximum size,
the conduit truncates the message. For example, the maximum message size
might be 50KB, and the message might have the following:
Other e-mail
applications Select Microsoft Exchange 5.0 or later as a choice for the Mail
Client option if your e-mail application is compatible with
extended MAPI. If your e-mail application is compatible with
SMAPI, select Microsoft Outlook Express as a choice for the
Mail Client option.
Message header 1KB
Body 20KB
Attachment 1 40KB
Attachment 2 20KB
Mail Client Action
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
227
In this case the conduit puts the message header, body, and attachment 2—
totaling 41KB—on the handheld. Attachment 1 is removed because adding it to
the message causes the message to exceed the maximum.
–Days in Which to Synchronize Mail: Set how many days of e-mail, between 0
and 999, that e-mail should be synchronized. A value of 0 synchronizes all
e-mail in the Inbox during the next HotSync operation. For other values, the
conduit synchronizes e-mail for today and the number of days preceding
today. For example, if you enter a value of 2, e-mail is synchronized for today
and yesterday, but if you enter 3, e-mail is synchronized for today, yesterday,
and the day before.
–Synchronize unread messages only: Select whether to synchronize all e-mail
between your desktop and your handheld, or unread e-mail only. By default,
the check box is unselected, meaning that all e-mail will be synchronized.
–Download attachments: Select whether to download attachments during
synchronization. By default, the check box is selected; if unselected, only the
body text of any message containing an attachment will be downloaded to
your handheld during synchronization.
–Send e-mail from Outbox: Select the Synchronize the Outbox check box to
send any e-mail in the handheld’s Outbox during the next HotSync
operation.
–Synchronize Inbox: Select the Synchronize the Inbox check box to
synchronize the Inbox during the next HotSync operation.
7. (Optional) If available, click Folder Synchronization Options and set folder
synchronization options.
(QUERY: When is the Folder Synchronization Options button available?
What are the options if you click the button?)
(QUERY: There is a Business Account Settings section of this screen; is
this for i705 only?)
You can now set synchronization options for your handheld for the selected
account.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
228
To set handheld synchronization settings:
1. Under the selected account name, click the plus sign to the left of Device
Settings.
2. Click Account Information
3. If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld, the
account information will already be entered. If not, enter the following:
Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing
messages, such as “Joe Smith.
E-mail Address Enter the e-mail address of the account you are accessing,
such as examplename@yahoo.com.
Click plus
sign
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
229
4. Under Device Settings, click Server Settings.
5. If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld, the
account information will already be entered. If not, enter the following:
–Incoming Mail Server: Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server,
such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.
–Incoming Mail Server Port Number: The default is 110 for POP and 143 for
IMAP servers respectively. If you are not sure about the correct port number,
check with your mail server administrator.
–Whether this account requires APOP authentication (POP accounts only):
Selecting this check box encrypts your username and password when
traveling over the network. Some services require APOP to work properly,
while others do not work properly if APOP is used. If you aren’t sure if your
ISP or web e-mail provider supports APOP, check with your e-mail provider.
See “Adding APOP to an account” later in this chapter.
–Outgoing Mail Server: Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server,
such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
–Outgoing Mail Server Port Number: The default is 25, the port number most
SMTP servers use. If you are not sure about the correct port number, check
with your mail server administrator.
–Whether this account requires ESMTP authentication: Select this option if the
outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system
Login Name Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is
generally the part of your e-mail address appearing before
the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire e-mail address.
Password Enter the password for this account.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
230
administrator before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an
account” later in this chapter. If you select this option, you will be prompted
to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a username and
password.
6. Click Save to save the settings for this account.
(QUERY: Do we want to explain the buttons at the top of the
configuration screen? Or is that overkill?)
Verifying handheld account settings before synchronizing accounts
Certain settings you configure on your handheld for a given e-mail account must
be set correctly for the synchronization process as well. Before configuring an
e-mail client on your desktop for synchronization, be sure to verify the following
settings on your handheld:
■APOP and ESMTP: If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
either APOP or ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require
ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use APOP or ESMTP on
your handheld. See “Adding APOP to an account” and “Adding ESMTP to an
account” later in this chapter for details.
■Mail filters: Any mail filters you have configured for a given e-mail account on
your handheld also apply during the synchronization process. For example, if
you have set filters to accept only e-mail containing the subject words “Current
Software Project,” only those same messages are synchronized between your
desktop and your handheld. Be sure to turn mail filters off if you want to
synchronize all messages between your desktop and your handheld. See
“Turning filters on and off” later in this chapter for details.
Configuring Microsoft Outlook
You can synchronize Microsoft Outlook 97/98/2000/XP with a VersaMail e-mail
account, but you must set Microsoft Outlook as the default e-mail handler. You
must check your username and password.
To configure Microsoft Outlook:
1. In the Control Panel, click Internet Options.
NOTE For Windows XP, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click
Internet Options.
2. Click the Programs tab.
3. Select Microsoft Outlook as the default e-mail program.
4. Click OK.
NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Microsoft
Outlook.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
231
Configuring Microsoft Outlook Express
You can synchronize a VersaMail e-mail account with Microsoft Outlook Express
5.5 or 6.0, but you must set Outlook Express as the default e-mail handler.
NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Outlook
Express.
To configure Outlook Express:
1. In the Control Panel, click Internet Options.
NOTE For Windows XP, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click
Internet Options.
2. Click the Programs tab.
3. Select Outlook Express as the default e-mail program.
4. Click OK.
TIP You can also make Outlook Express the default e-mail handler within the e-mail
application. From the Tools menu, select Options. Click the General tab, and then click
Make Default.
Configuring Eudora
If you are using Eudora as your e-mail application, you must set up MAPI in
Eudora.
To set up MAPI in Eudora:
1. From the Eudora Tools menu, select Options.
2. Do one of the following:
– If Eudora is the only e-mail application that you use, select Always as the
MAPI setting.
– If you use more than one e-mail application, select When Eudora is running
as the MAPI setting.
3. Ensure that your username and password are set up correctly within Eudora.
This information is needed to log in to Eudora to retrieve and synchronize your
e-mail.
IMPORTANT Eudora must be running in order for you to perform a HotSync
operation. The VersaMail application synchronizes with your Dominant Personality in
Eudora 5.1 or later.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
232
Converting attached files
You can use attachment conversion plug-ins to convert attached files that you are
receiving. Your handheld comes with DataViz Documents To Go version 5
installed, and Documents To Go plug-ins are automatically configured.
Documents To Go enables you to convert attachments using HotSync operations.
With Documents To Go, you can view Word, Excel, and PowerPoint attachments
on your handheld. See the Documents To Go Getting Started Manual for more
information.
When you receive a message with an attachment on your handheld, the file is
converted to the DataViz format on the handheld when you perform a HotSync
operation. You can then read and edit the file in Documents To Go on the handheld.
In the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit, you can turn off DataViz Documents To
Go plug-ins or select other plug-ins.
To turn off attachment conversion plug-ins:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
2. Select Custom.
3. Select VersaMail in the Conduit list.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
233
4. Click Attachment Conversion.
5. Plug-in types are listed in the left column. If the plug-in is selected, the right
column shows the name of the company supplying the plug-in. If a plug-in is
not selected, the right column reads Not Selected.
NOTE The drop-down lists in the right column display only the companies
currently supplying plug-ins for a particular type. If more than one company
supplies a plug-in of a particular type (for example, Word doc), then multiple
company names appear on the list. If no company is currently supplying a
plug-in of a particular type, then the only option that appears on the list is Not
Selected.
Do one of the following:
6. Click save.
Item Action
To deselect a plug-in Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and
then select Not Selected from the drop-down list.
To select a plug-in Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and
then select the name of the company supplying the
plug-in from the drop-down list.
To change the
company supplying a
plug-in of a particular
type
Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and
then select the name of the company you want to supply
the plug-in from the drop-down list.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
234
Synchronizing an account
To synchronize accounts, you must set the HotSync action for the VersaMail
application in the HotSync Manager. You can, however, exclude e-mail accounts
from a HotSync operation.
TIP If you don’t want an account synchronized, deselect the check box Select this
check box to synchronize this e-mail account when you perform a HotSync operation.
To select which accounts are synchronized during a HotSync operation:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
2. Select Custom.
3. Select VersaMail in the Conduit list.
4. Click Change.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
235
5. Select one of the following:
6. (Optional) Select Set Selection As Default to apply the options you selected to
all subsequent HotSync operations. Otherwise, the settings apply to the next
HotSync operation only.
7. Click OK.
8. Perform a HotSync operation.
Synchronization limits
You can synchronize more than one account during the same HotSync operation.
The maximum number of accounts you can synchronize are as follows:
■1 Simple MAPI account (for example, an account set up using Outlook Express
or Eudora)
■1 Extended MAPI account (for example, an account set up using Outlook)
■1 Lotus Notes account
■5 combined direct POP or direct IMAP accounts
If you attempt to synchronize more than the limit for a particular type of account
during a HotSync operation, you will receive an alert prompting you to deactivate
any accounts over the allowed number.
Using SSL with the conduit
When you set up an e-mail account, you can choose to use a secure connection
(Secure Sockets Layer or SSL) for sending and receiving e-mail messages. The
Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit supports SSL when synchronizing with an
e-mail account only if that account uses one of the following desktop e-mail
applications (mail clients):
■Outlook
■Outlook Express
■Eudora
The conduit does not support SSL for accounts set up as direct POP or direct IMAP.
Synchronize
Active Accounts Select this option to include active accounts in the next
HotSync operation. For an account to be synchronized, you
must have selected the option Check this box to synchronize
this mail account when you performed a HotSync operation.
Do Nothing Select this option to exclude e-mail accounts from the next
HotSync operation.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
236
Going beyond the basics
Many of the VersaMail application features, such as getting and sending e-mail,
you use daily. Other features are used less frequently but are especially valuable in
certain situations. For example, filtering e-mail is helpful if you are traveling and
want to receive messages only from certain people or about specific subjects.
Filters and other special features are discussed in this chapter.
This section describes the following:
■Creating and using filters to determine which e-mail you actually view
■Managing mail settings
■Adding APOP to an account
■Adding ESMTP to an account
■Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applications
■Using the command bar
■Viewing e-mail header details
■Backing up your mail databases
■Synchronizing IMAP folders wirelessly
■Accessing corporate e-mail
■Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
■Viewing the wireless coverage indicator
■Troubleshooting common account access problems
The chapter ends with a summary of the VersaMail application navigator controls
and keyboard shortcuts
Managing mail filters
Filters provide efficient ways to manage e-mail retrieval and storage. When you
tap Get Mail or Get & Send, filters determine which e-mail messages are
downloaded to your handheld and in which folder the downloaded messages are
stored.
For example, you may want to file e-mail about sales meetings in a Sales folder.
You can create a filter that automates this action, so that whenever you receive
e-mail about sales meetings, it is immediately sent to the Sales folder, which you
created in the filters screen.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
237
Creating mail filters
To create a mail filter, you select various criteria, such as To, From, and Contains.
This information makes up the filter statement.
For example, if you want stock quotes from your online brokerage service sent to
a specific folder, you can filter those e-mail messages and store them in the Inbox
folder. The filter statement, which is displayed in the Filter Editor, is shown in the
following figure.
To create a filter:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options, and then select Filter Mail.
3. Tap New.
4. Enter a short description of the filter in the Name field.
5. Use the If the pick lists to create criteria for the filter.
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
238
The three pick lists and the edit line combine to create a statement that identifies
the type of e-mail and where you want the e-mail stored. For example, a filter
might read, “If the [Subject] [Contains] sales meeting, Then get mail and move
to [Sales].” When you use this filter to sort incoming e-mail, any e-mail
containing sales meetings in the subject line is filed in the Sales folder.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
The filter appears in the Filters list.
Selected filters execute in the order in which they appear on the list. Move filters
up and down the list to ensure that they execute in the correct order.
NOTE Filters created on the handheld also apply to e-mail synchronization. See
“Synchronizing an account” earlier in this chapter for more information.
Turning filters on and off
By default, a filter that is turned on or selected affects all subsequent downloads of
e-mail until you deselect it. More than one filter can be in effect at once. Before you
download e-mail, be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you
don’t want.
To pick list Select the message header field with the information
contained in the edit line: To, From, Subject, cc, Date, Size.
For example, you might select Date to download only
messages that are less than a certain number of days old.
Contains pick list Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does NOT
Contain.
Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For
example, if you want to sort e-mail with the subject Sales,
enter “Sales.” If you enter more than one criteria, separate
each with a comma, for example—Sales, New York.
Then get mail and
move to pick list Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your
filtered e-mail to go. You can also create a new folder for
storing the incoming e-mail. Tap Edit Folders, and then
create a new folder or delete or rename existing ones.
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
239
To turn a filter on or off:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options, and then select Filters.
The Filters dialog box appears with the filters you created.
3. Tap the pick list in the upper-left corner, and select Connected Accounts or
Synchronize Only Accounts.
– Connected applies a filter to a modem transaction.
– Sync Only applies a filter to a HotSync operation.
4. Tap the filter check boxes to select the filters you want to use for subsequent
e-mail transactions.
IMPORTANT If you deselect a filter listed under Connected, be sure that the filter
is deselected also under Synchronize.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Filters with a check mark
are turned on
FLOW
FLOW
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
240
Editing or deleting a filter
You can edit a filter to change its name or the criteria in the filter.
To edit or delete a filter:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options, and then select Filters.
3. Tap the name of the filter.
4. Do one of the following:
– To edit the filter, revise your entry in the Name field and/or your selections
in the pick lists, and revise the text in the edit line. Tap OK.
– To delete the filter, tap Delete, and then tap Yes to confirm deletion.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Managing mail settings
You can configure advanced mail settings such as server information, incoming
and outgoing mail server options, and more for each e-mail account.
To select the account whose settings you want to manage:
1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options.
3. Select Mail Servers.
Shows server settings for current
account. Tap the Account pick list
to edit the account
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
241
4. Tap the Account pick list, and then tap Edit Accounts.
5. Tap the name of the account whose settings you want to manage, and then
tap OK.
To change the protocol type:
1. In the Server Settings screen, tap the Protocol pick list, and then tap POP or
IMAP.
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To change your username or password:
1. In the Server Settings screen, enter a new username.
Your username is typically the first part of your e-mail address, which appears
before the @ symbol.
All e-mail accounts
appear in the list
PICK LIST
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
242
2. Tap the Password box, and enter a new password in the Password Entry dialog
box.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To set a default service for this account (different from the default service for your handheld):
1. In the Server Settings screen, tap the Always Connect Using check box.
2. Tap the connection type you want from the Services pick list.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
NOTE Select this option only if you want a given e-mail account to use a
different service from the default service you set for your handheld. For
example, you may have selected a default service that uses the built-in 802.11b
radio on your handheld to make a dial-up connection with your corporate
account through a VPN. However, for your Earthlink account, you may want to
switch to the Earthlink service, which uses a Bluetooth Card inserted into your
handheld’s card expansion slot to make a connection with your GPRS service
provider. To do this, tap this check box, then select Earthlink from the Services
pick list. Leave this box deselected if you want to use your default handheld
service for this e-mail account.
See Chapter 18 for information on setting connection types and selecting a
default service for your handheld. See “Selecting a different service for a given
e-mail account” earlier in this chapter for details on using a different service for
a specific e-mail account.
Tap to change the service
connection for this e-mail
account only from your default
handheld service connection
Select a service connection for
this e-mail account only
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
243
To change e-mail address/mail server settings:
1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the Options pick list and select Address/Servers.
3. Edit any of the following:
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
E-mail address Enter the e-mail address of the account you are accessing,
such as examplename@yahoo.com.
Incoming mail
server Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as
pop.mail.yahoo.com.
Outgoing mail
server Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as
smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
244
To change incoming mail server settings:
1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the Options pick list and select Incoming Mail.
3. Select or enter either of the following:
.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
If you are using the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit and have an IMAP
account, you must configure the outgoing mail settings to send mail.
Get unread mail
ONLY Retrieves unread e-mail only. To get all e-mail and not just
unread e-mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY.
Maximum
Message Size Shows the maximum message size that you can receive.
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
245
To set additional incoming mail options:
1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming.
3. The incoming mail options are different depending on the connection type you
selected and the server protocol—POP or IMAP.
Port Number Defaults to 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers
respectively. If you are not sure about the correct port
number, check with your mail server administrator.
Secure
Connection Retrieves incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer
or SSL) connection. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)”
later in this chapter for information on SSL.
Leave mail on
server (POP only) Leaves e-mail that you receive on the handheld on the server
also.
Use APOP
(POP only) Encrypts your username and password when traveling over
the network. Some services require APOP to work properly,
while others do not work properly if APOP is used. If you
aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider supports
APOP, check with your e-mail provider. See “Adding APOP
to an account” later in this chapter.
NEW SCREEN
POP
accounts
IMAP
accounts
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
246
To set outgoing mail server (SMTP) settings:
1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the Options pick list and select Outgoing Mail.
3. Enter any of the following:
Mailbox (IMAP
only) Defines the root mailbox on your IMAP server.
Deleted Mail
(IMAP only) Stores deleted e-mail in the folder you specify on the server.
This field is case sensitive, so spell the folder name exactly as
it is on the server. For example, if your Deleted Mail folder is
called Trash on the server, you must enter Trash in this space.
Sent Mail (IMAP
only) Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server. This
field is case sensitive, and the folder name should be spelled
exactly as it is on the server.
Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing
messages, such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To Address Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if it is different from
the e-mail address from which you are sending the message.
For example, if you are sending a message from
me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to reply to
me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. Reply To
Address makes it look like the e-mail came from the address
you entered.
BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the
message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages
you send from your handheld to be sent to your desktop
e-mail account, enter that e-mail address.
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
247
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To set additional outgoing mail options:
1. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing.
3. Set additional options for outgoing e-mail:
Port Number The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If
you are not sure about the correct port number, check with
your mail server administrator.
Secure
Connection Sends outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer or
SSL) connection. See “Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)”
later in this chapter for information on SSL.
My server requires
authentication
(ESMTP)
Select this option if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires
authentication. Check with your system administrator
before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an
account” later in this chapter. If you select this option, you
will be prompted to enter a username and password for
authentication. Enter a username, tap the Password box,
enter a password, and tap OK.
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
248
4. Press Function + Enter twice, or tap OK twice.
Adding APOP to an account
To encrypt your username and password when traveling over the network, some
services require APOP to work properly, while others do not work properly if
APOP is used. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider supports APOP,
check with your e-mail provider.
NOTE APOP works only with accounts that use the POP protocol.
To edit an account and add APOP:
1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options.
3. Select Mail Servers.
4. Tap the Account pick list and select Edit Accounts.
5. Tap the name of the account you want to change, and then tap OK.
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
All e-mail accounts
appear in the list
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
249
6. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
7. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming.
8. Select the Use APOP check box.
9. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Adding ESMTP to an account
Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and
password on a given SMTP server. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail
provider supports ESMTP, check with your e-mail provider.
To edit an account and add ESMTP:
1. In your Inbox or another folder screen, press Function + Menu .
2. Select Options.
3. Select Mail Servers.
PICK LIST
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
250
4. Tap the Account pick list and select Edit Accounts.
5. Tap the name of the account you want to change, and then tap OK.
6. In the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
7. Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing.
8. Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) check box. You will be
prompted to enter a username and password for authentication. Enter a
username, tap the Password box, enter a password, and tap OK.
9. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
All e-mail accounts
appear in the list
PICK LIST
PICK LIST
Username and Password fields appear only i
ESMTP check box is selected
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
251
Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applications
You can copy any text from an e-mail message, either from one you have composed
or have read or from an attachment you have downloaded and opened (such as a
Word doc), for use elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another
application. Text you can select and copy includes:
■A name
■An e-mail address
■Body text of an e-mail message or a downloaded attachment
To copy and paste text from an e-mail message:
1. Select the text by dragging the stylus over it.
2. Press Command + C.
3. To paste the text elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another
application, go to the new location and press Command + V.
You can also cut or copy text from a Word document that you download as an
attachment and view on your handheld. You can then paste this text in another
part of the Word document, another Word document, or another application on
your handheld.
To cut/copy and paste text from within a Word document:
(QUERY: What are the steps?)
See “Performing common tasks” in Chapter 4 (X-REF) for more information on
copying and pasting.
Using the command bar
The command bar provides shortcuts for performing numerous tasks. The options
presented on the command bar may change, depending on which screen is
displayed in the application. For example, if you are viewing a message in the
Inbox, the command bar gives you the option of quickly moving the message to
another folder. See “Moving e-mail between folders” earlier in this chapter.
To access the command bar on your handheld:
■Press Command on the keyboard.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
252
For each type of screen, the command bar offers various options.
See “Using menu commands and the command toolbar” in Chapter 3 (X-REF) for
more information on the command bar.
View Options
List (Inbox, Outbox, and so
on showing list of
messages
Select all messages.
Deselect all messages.
Change display font (toggles between large and
small font).
Delete messages from the handheld; icon appears
only if you have previously selected all messages.
Reading a message Delete message from the handheld.
Move message to a different folder; select folder
from pick list.
Change display font (toggles between large and
small font).
Composing a message Insert the @ symbol into a recipient’s e-mail
address.
Add attachment.
Undoes last action; icon appears in command bar
only if you have previously performed one of the
actions above or any of the cut/copy/paste
functions described below.
Reading or composing a
message Cuts selected text.
Copies selected text.
Pastes selected text.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
253
E-mail header details
When viewing a message in any folder, you can change the view of the message
header. The e-mail header options as follows:
■Short header: Shows sender’s name or address (From field) and subject line
(Subj field).
■Full header: Shows the following:
– Sender’s name or e-mail address (From field)
– Subject line (Subj field)
– Date message was composed, sent, or received (Date field)
– Size of message including any attachments (Size field)
– Recipient’s name or e-mail address (To field)
You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are
composing. Short header shows the To and Subject fields only; full header shows
the To, cc:, bcc:, and Subject fields.
Tap header icon to switch to full
header
Short header
shows sender
name and
message subject
only
Tap header icon to switch to
short header
Full header
shows sender,
subject, date,
size, and
recipient
information
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
254
To switch between short header and full header view, tap the header icon in the
upper-right corner of the message screen.
Backing up mail databases
In most cases your e-mail is on your server, so you do not need to back up your
e-mail database from your handheld. If you want to make sure you have a current
copy of all your e-mail, you can back up all the e-mail databases from the
handheld.
To back up the e-mail database:
1. Press Command + R.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , select Options, and then select
Preferences.
2. Tap System.
3. Tap Backup ALL Databases to select it.
NOTE If you don’t select this option, HotSync operations are faster.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
NEW SCREEN SHOTS OF FULL/SHORT
HEADERS ON MESSAGE SCREEN
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
255
Wireless IMAP folder synchronization
If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your handheld that matches a folder
on the mail server, you can wirelessly synchronize e-mail messages that you move
into or out of the IMAP folder, or delete in the folder.
When you synchronize a folder, any e-mail messages in the selected folder on the
mail server will be downloaded to the same folder on your handheld. Any
messages moved out of the selected folder on your handheld or deleted on your
handheld will be moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server.
Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your handheld and/or the
mail server, you may have to perform some steps before you can wirelessly
synchronize e-mail messages between your handheld and the server, as follows:
■If you need to create a folder on both your handheld and the server, see
“Creating and editing mail folders” earlier in this chapter. Be sure to select the
Also create on server check box as described in that section, After creating the
folders, continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP
folders.
■If there is a folder on the mail server but need to create it on your handheld. see
“Creating and editing mail folders” earlier in this chapter. You do not need to
select the Also create on server check box as described in that section. After
creating the folder, continue with the following procedures for synchronizing
IMAP folders below.
■If you have a folder on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server,
continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders.
You can synchronize either a single pair of handheld/mail server folders, or
multiple pairs of folders.
NOTE You can synchronize folders whose names are up to 16 characters in length.
You can synchronize up to 11 custom folders you create, in addition to the default
folders Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and Trash.
To wirelessly synchronize a single pair of handheld/mail server IMAP folders:
1. From within an IMAP e-mail account, tap the folders pick list in the upper-right
corner of the screen and select the folder you want to synchronize.
2. Tap Get Mail.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
256
To synchronize multiple pairs of IMAP folders:
1. In your Inbox or another folder screen of an IMAP e-mail account, press
Function + Menu .
2. Select Options.
3. Press Command + L (alternately, select Sync IMAP Folders).
4. Select the folders you want to synchronize from the pick list either by tapping
the folder name or by using the navigator, as follows:
5. A connection is made to your network provider to update the server with
changes from your handheld, and to have your handheld updated with changes
from the server.
Accessing corporate e-mail
Many corporate e-mail servers—including Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Domino
servers—support direct IMAP access. If you are accessing your e-mail using the
VersaMail application and an 802.11 network behind your company’s firewall, you
may be able to directly access your corporate e-mail. If your company requires
extra security or you are accessing your e-mail through either a dial-up connection
or a LAN outside of your company’s firewall, you will need to use a Virtual Private
Network (VPN) client before you can access your business e-mail. Check with your
company’s network administrator for information about VPN access, your
business e-mail username and password, and IMAP and SMTP settings. See
(X-REF) for information on setting up a VPN on your handheld.
Button Action
Select If no folder is selected, the Select button highlights the first
visible folder on the list. If a folder is selected, the Select button
toggles the check box between selected and deselected.
Up or Down If a folder is selected, the Up and Down scroll up or down one
folder on the list. If no folder is selected, Up and Down scroll
up or down one page.
Left If a folder is selected, deselects the folder. No function is no
folder is selected.
Right No function.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
257
Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol designed to ensure that data you send to
or receive from a network or the Internet is secure and authentic. The VersaMail
application uses SSL to help guarantee the secure transmission of e-mail messages
that you send and receive. When you set up an account in the VersaMail
application, you are given the option of selecting SSL for both incoming and
outgoing mail. See “Setting up and managing e-mail accounts” earlier in this
chapter for instructions.
If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook, Outlook Express,
or Eudora, then SSL is supported in the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit when
you synchronize with that account as well.
NOTE You cannot use push mail with notification or scheduled sending retry of
e-mail with accounts that use an SSL connection. See “Push mail with notification”
and “Send retry” earlier in this chapter for information.
Viewing the wireless coverage indicator
Your handheld contains a status indicator for determining the strength of wireless
coverage in your area. You can access this indicator from the within the VersaMail
application by pressing Command +
(QUERY: What key do you press to see the indicator?)
. See (X-REF to wireless coverage indicator section) for more information.
Troubleshooting account access problems
Topics:
■some providers force you to be on their networks
■settings frequently change
■anything else?
(QUERY: Steve: need your help here, both what to include & what to say
about it)
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
258
Five-way navigation in the VersaMail application
The following table summarizes the controls for the five-way navigator on your
handheld that are specific to the VersaMail application. See “Using the navigator”
in Chapter 3 (X-REF) for general navigator information.
View Selection Navigation Function
Main List
(Inbox or
other folder
list)
No message
selected Up/Down Scrolls between messages in list.
Select Highlights the first message in the
list.
Right No function.
Left No function.
Message
selected Select Opens messages for viewing.
Right Displays context menu that normally
appears when clicking on the e-mail
icon for each message.
Left Returns you to the “no message
selected” options.
Compose
New Message N/A Up/Down In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields: Tabs
to the next/previous field.
In message body text: Scrolls the text
viewed on the text list.
Select No function.
Right In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields:
Moves to the next character.
In message body text: No function.
Left In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields:
Moves to previous character.
In message body text: No function.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
259
When you return from viewing a message to the list view (Inbox or other folder),
the message you were viewing may or may not be selected in the list, according on
the following:
■If you pressed Select to view the message, the message will be highlighted on
the list on when you return to the list view
■If you used the stylus or pressed Right or Left to view the message, the message
will not be highlighted when you return to the list view. If you press Select, the
first message in the list will be selected.
The following sample procedure shows how to use the navigator to read and
delete a message.
To read and delete a message:
1. Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the message you want to read.
2. Press Select to select the message, and then press Select again to open the
message.
3. After reading the message, press Select to close the message.
4. (Optional) The cursor should remain on the selected message. If not, press Up
or Down to scroll to the message, and press Select to select the message.
5. Press Right to open the pop-up menu.
6. Press Down to scroll to Delete Message.
7. Press Select to delete the message.
8. Press Select to confirm that you want to delete the message.
Read
Message N/A Up/Down Scrolls the message text.
Select Returns you to list view.
Right Displays the next message. If you are
is viewing the last message, returns
you to the folder list view.
Left Displays the previous message. If
you are viewing the first message in
the folder, returns you to the folder
list view.
View Selection Navigation Function
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
260
Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail application
The following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts specific to the VersaMail
application. See (X-REF TO SHORTCUT INFO) for general keyboard shortcut
information.
To use a keyboard shortcut:
1. Press Command .
2. Press the letter of the shortcut.
ShortCut Feature
A Add Attachment
(QUERY: is this
still being used?)
CCopy
DDelete
EEmpty Trash
F Forward Message
HMark Read
I Mark Unread
KKeyboard
L Address Lookup
MGet Message
N Create New Message
O Reply to Message
(QUERY: is this
still being used?)
PPaste
QGo to Bottom
RPreferences ...
SSelect All
TGo to Top
U Undo
VMove To …
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Going beyond the basics
261
W Save to Draft
XCut
YSend
Z Deselect All
Press & hold Mail Get & Send
ShortCut Feature
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 14 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
262
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
263
CHAPTER 15
Using Palm™ Web Browser
Palm™ Web Browser is your gateway to the web. Use Palm Web Browser to
do the following:
■Visit web pages.
■Change your home page.
■Bookmark your favorite sites.
Using Palm Web Browser’s features
Palm Web Browser is a fast web browser that has a number of features that make
it easy to use. The browser is secure and has an informative tips that help you
effectively access the web.
Palm Web Browser is easy to use
Palm Web Browser is easy to use because it works much like the web browsers you
use on your desktop computer. You can enter web addresses (also called
URLs—Uniform Resource Locators), create bookmarks to mark favorite pages,
save pages, and even download files directly to your handheld.
More importantly, Palm Web Browser is designed to be used on the small screen of
your handheld. It forces images to fit the handheld’s screen; it doesn’t clutter your
screen with fancy icons; and it handles technical features (like plug-ins) with
minimal input from you.
Palm Web Browser is fast
Palm Web Browser is designed with the knowledge that you may be viewing web
pages using a slow connection. Palm Web Browser processes each web page to
make the download as fast as possible, compressing the text, removing some large
images, and compressing other images. In addition, Palm Web Browser has
preferences that you can adjust to make downloading even faster.
Because wireless Internet connections tend to be slower than the wired connections
common on desktop computers, Palm Web Browser also avoids downloading a
web page when it can display that page from memory. Before it downloads a web
page, it can check with the web server to see if the content in memory is up-to-date.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
264
If you set the option to display web pages already in memory, you are on occasion
likely to see a web page with a banner that says something like, “This content is
X days old.” This banner informs you that instead of connecting to the Internet,
Palm Web Browser is displaying a page from memory. Of course, you can refresh
the page anytime. You can also have Palm Web Browser display a confirmation
dialog box so that you must manually accept every connection made to the
Internet.
Palm Web Browser is secure
Palm Web Browser uses advanced encryption technology from Certicom.
Encryption makes your data unreadable by anyone but the intended recipient.
This encryption technology is used to secure the transmission of sensitive
information, such as credit card numbers, e-mail messages, and passwords. Data
is protected both when sent from your handheld over the network and when
coming in from the Internet directly to your handheld. For more information about
Certicom’s encryption technology, visit the Certicom web site: www.certicom.com.
When a wireless transaction is secured, the command button that initiates the
transaction is marked by the security icon, which looks like a key:
It’s not unusual to experience an additional delay of several seconds when a
transaction is being encrypted.
What Palm Web Browser looks like
When you start Palm Web Browser for the first time, the following screen—the
default home page—appears:
The Palm Web Browser screen has three parts:
■The title bar displays the name of the current web page.
■The action icons let you navigate in the browser, refresh pages, and look at your
lists of favorite pages.
Security icon
Title bar
Action icons
Web content
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using Palm Web Browser’s features
265
■The rest of the screen is devoted to displaying the content of the web page.
You can perform other actions by tapping items in menus. Like other Palm OS®
applications, when you press Function + Menu , the title bar is replaced
by the menu bar.
Getting help in Palm Web Browser
Help is available in the following locations:
■The links under Web Browser Tips on the Palm Web Browser home page.
■Most dialog boxes in Palm Web Browser have help about the options in the
dialog box. To see that information, tap the Tips icon .
M
enu
b
ar
Menu items
Links to Help topics
Tap the Tips icon for
more information on
a dialog box.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
266
Opening Palm Web Browser
To open Palm Web Browser:
■Press the Wireless application button on the front panel of your handheld.
Palm Web Browser may take a moment to load the first page.
■Press Home . and then select the Web Browser icon .
When you open Palm Web Browser, you immediately go to your home page.
Browsing the Web on your handheld
Just like the web browser you use on your desktop computer, Palm Web Browser
lets you browse the web in several ways:
■Visit a web page by entering its web address, also called a URL.
■Visit another web page by tapping a link.
■Go back to the pages you already visited by using the Back and Forward icons.
Visiting a web page
To visit a web page:
1. Press Command Stroke + O, or tap the Open URL icon .
2. Enter the URL of the web page you want to visit.
The field in the Open URL dialog box already contains the characters “www.”
If the web address you want to enter starts with another set of letters, just drag
over the “www.” and press the Delete key to erase them.
Tap buttons to enter other characters commonly used in web addresses.
3. Tap Go.
Wireless button
(Optional) Tap buttons to
complete the web address
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Browsing the Web on your handheld
267
During the short delay while the new page is downloaded, the title bar displays
information about the download process.
Following a link
Many web pages contain links, which are text or pictures that when clicked, take
you to another web page or to another part of the same page. Like many other web
browsers, Palm Web Browser highlights these links by underlining them.
To follow a link:
■Tap the link.
Returning to a web page you just visited
To go back to the last web page you visited:
■Tap the Back icon .
To go back to an earlier page:
■Tap the Back icon until you return to the page you want.
The list of stored pages (which is limited by your handheld’s memory) is called
the History list.
Stop icon changes appearance
during download
Indicates how much data has
been downloaded so far (in
kilobytes)
Tells you what Palm Web
Browser is doing (receiving
data, sending data)
Links
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
268
To go forward through the History list:
■Tap the Forward icon .
Returning to your home page
Your home page is the web page Palm Web Browser displays every time you
open it.
To return to your home page:
■Tap the Home icon .
“Changing your home page” later in this chapter for information about changing
your home page.
Downloading a file to your handheld
Palm Web Browser can download files such as text files, word processor
documents, or pictures, as well as web pages. Downloading a file is much like
visiting a web page.
To download a file by following a link from a web page:
1. Tap the link.
When you download a Palm OS® application (PRC) or Palm OS database (PDB),
your handheld recognizes the file and installs it.
2. If a warning message appears asking you to confirm the file you want to
download, and the file is the one you want, press Function + Enter , or
tap OK.
3. If the file has to be handed off to another application (such as Address Book),
you see a dialog box that prompts you to accept the file transfer.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Refreshing a page
269
The progress information in the title bar tells you how much data has been
downloaded to your handheld.
If your handheld can’t recognize the file type, you see an alert dialog box that
tells you that the file is in an unknown format. Palm Web Browser does not
download the file.
Stopping the download process
If you decide that the download process is taking too long, you can stop it.
To stop a page or a file from downloading:
■Tap the Stop icon .
You can make changes to improve the download speed, such as removing images
from your web pages. See “Changing how images are downloaded” later in this
chapter.
Refreshing a page
Some web pages, such as news sites, change frequently. If you visit a page and
spend several minutes reading an article, the web site may change during that
time. To make sure you have the latest content, refresh the page.
To refresh a page:
■Tap the Refresh icon .
You can also view old content instead of accessing the Internet. (See “Controlling
how Palm Web Browser accesses the Internet” later in this chapter.) Palm Web
Browser lets you know you’re looking at old content by putting a banner at the top
of the page. You can force Palm Web Browser to download the latest content from
the Internet by refreshing the page.
Banner
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
270
Viewing information about a web page
Because of the limited space on the handheld screen, Palm Web Browser doesn’t
display the current web address (URL) all the time. To find the name, size, and
address of the current web page, open the Web Page Info dialog box.
To view information about the current web page:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Info in the Page menu.
To see the entire URL, tap the box. The URL displays in the URL Viewer.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
You can also use this method to view information about saved pages. However, the
information you see might be different from the information for regular web pages.
Bookmarking Your Favorite Pages
When you read a printed book, you place a bookmark at the page where you
stopped reading so that you can remember where you stopped. In the same way,
you can bookmark a web page for later reference. A bookmark in Palm Web
Browser doesn’t store the actual page; instead, it stores a reference to the page’s
web address (URL).
Adding a bookmark
If you would like to visit the current page again, add a bookmark to the Bookmark
list.
To add a bookmark for the current page:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Bookmark URL in the Page menu.
3. (Optional) Change the bookmark name, URL, or category.
Tap here to change the bookmark name
Tap here to change the URL
Tap here to choose a category
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Bookmarking Your Favorite Pages
271
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
You can also add a bookmark by going to the Web Content dialog box, tapping
Bookmarks, and then tapping Add.
Visiting a bookmarked page
Use your list of bookmarks to visit a particular page again.
To visit a bookmarked page:
1. Tap the Web Content icon .
2. Tap Bookmarks.
3. Tap the name of the bookmarked page you want to visit.
4. Tap Go.
Editing information about a bookmark
You can edit the name and URL of a bookmark, and change its category.
To edit information about a bookmark:
1. Tap the Web Content icon .
2. Tap Bookmarks.
3. Tap the name of the bookmark you want to edit.
4. Tap Edit.
5. Tap the Name field, and then enter the new name.
6. Tap the URL box to display the URL Viewer and change the address.
Bookmarked page name
Scroll bar
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
272
7. Tap the Category pick list to change the category or create a new category.
8. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done to return to the Web Content dialog
box.
9. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Deleting a bookmark
You can delete bookmarks that you no longer want.
To delete a bookmark:
1. Tap the Web Content icon .
2. Tap Bookmarks.
3. Tap the name of the bookmarked page you want to delete.
4. Tap Edit.
5. Tap Delete.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Tap Delete.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Saving Pages
Although Palm Web Browser keeps a History list of all the pages you visited
recently, it doesn’t keep items in the list indefinitely. If you want to save a page
(such as a travel itinerary or Internet order receipt) indefinitely, create a saved
page. A saved page is a copy of the page. The copy is stored on the handheld until
you delete it.
Saving a page
To save a web page:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Save Page in the Page menu.
3. (Optional) Change the page name or category.
Tap here to enter the
new name
Tap here to change
the category
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Saving Pages
273
4. Tap Save.
You can also save a page by going to the Web Content dialog box, tapping Saved
Pages, and then tapping Save.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
274
Opening a saved page
When you open a saved page, remember that you’re only seeing a copy of the
actual page. To view the current version of the web page, enter the web address
again.
To open a saved page:
1. Tap the Web Content icon .
2. Tap Saved Pages.
3. Tap the name of the saved page you want to open.
4. Tap Go.
The page displays with a banner indicating when you saved the page.
Editing information about a saved page
You can edit the name of a saved page and change its category.
To edit information about a saved page:
1. Tap the Web Content icon .
2. Tap Saved Pages.
3. Tap the name of the saved page you want to open.
4. Tap Edit.
5. Tap the Name field, and then enter the new name.
Tap a name to select that page
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Finding Web Pages You Recently Visited
275
6. Tap the Category pick list to change the category or create a new category.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done to return to the Web Content dialog
box.
8. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Copying text from a page to another application
To copy the text of a web page into another application, use Copy Page. Copy Page
doesn’t copy images, only text.
To copy text from a page:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Edit, and then tap Copy Page.
You can then paste the copied page into another application, such as Memo Pad.
Deleting a saved page
To delete a saved page:
1. Tap the Web Content icon .
2. Tap Saved Pages.
3. Tap the name of the saved page you want to delete.
4. Tap Edit.
5. Tap Delete.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Tap Delete.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Finding Web Pages You Recently Visited
Using the Back and Forward icons to browse through the pages you recently
visited, one page at a time, can be tedious. Instead, use the History list to view a
list of the pages you visited and go directly to any page in that list. The History list
Tap here to enter the
new name
Tap here to change
the category
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
276
contains a record of all of the pages you visited recently, up to the limit you set in
Web Preferences.
Returning to a page you visited
To return to a page you visited:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap History in the Page menu.
3. Tap the name of the web page you want to visit.
Clearing the History list
If you need to free up memory on your handheld, clearing the History list can help.
IMPORTANT Clearing the History list removes all record of your recent browsing
history. If you need to remember the location of a page you recently visited, create a
bookmark or a saved page for that page before clearing the History list.
To clear the History list:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap History in the Page menu.
3. Tap Clear.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Tap Delete.
NOTE This action only clears the contents of the History list. Your bookmarks
and saved pages are not deleted.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
To change the default size of the History list so that it doesn’t use so much memory,
see “Changing the size of the History list”later in this chapter.
Tap a name to go to that page
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing Palm Web Browser
277
Customizing Palm Web Browser
You can change Palm Web Browser to improve the speed, ease-of-use, and security
of your browsing experience.
Changing the default size of text
If the default size of the text is too small, you can increase the size.
To change the default size of text:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Options, and then tap the appropriate menu item:
– Tap Bigger Font to make the text appear larger.
– Tap Smaller Font to make the text return to its original size.
Changing your home page
Your home page is the web page that displays when you first open Palm Web
Browser. You can change your home page to any web address.
To change your home page:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
3. Tap Home Page.
4. Do one of the following:
– Enter the address of the new home page.
– Tap Current Page to make the page currently displayed in Palm Web
Browser your home page.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Tap here to enter a new
web address
(Optional) Tap a button
to complete the web
address
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
278
Changing how images are downloaded
Images in web pages can be very large. You can make web pages download faster
by reducing image quality or removing images altogether. Alternatively, if you
have a fast Internet connection, you can have images downloaded so that they
appear at their highest quality.
To change how images are downloaded and displayed:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
3. Tap General.
4. Select one of the following items from the Graphics pick list:
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Enabling or disabling autofill
Filling out an order form or application on the web usually requires entering
several pieces of information: your name, address, phone number, and so on. By
default, Palm Web Browser stores the information you entered in these fields. The
next time you use that order form and type in the first few letters in a field, Palm
Web Browser remembers the last item you entered in that field that started with
those letters, and fills in the field.
No Images All web pages are downloaded without images.
Fastest Images are compressed. This makes downloading faster, but
results in reduced image quality.
Standard Image quality is average. This is the default setting and the
best compromise between speed and image quality.
Best Quality Images are downloaded at their highest quality. This may
result in longer download times.
Tap the pick list to see
the list of choices
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing Palm Web Browser
279
To enable or disable autofill:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
3. Tap General.
4. In the Autofill text fields check box, do one of the following:
– To turn off autofill, tap to remove the check mark.
– To turn on autofill, tap to select it.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Enabling or disabling cookies
Some web sites store information in a small text file, called a “cookie.” Cookies
usually contain information about you and your preferences for that web site. A
site can use this information to customize the pages you see the next time you visit.
Allowing a web site to create a cookie does not give the site access to the rest of
your handheld. A cookie only stores the information you provide while visiting
the web site.
By default, Palm Web Browser saves the cookies it receives. You can tell it not to
accept cookies.
To enable or disable cookies:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
3. Tap General.
4. In the Enable cookies check box, do one of the following:
– To prevent Palm Web Browser from storing cookies, tap to remove the check
mark.
– To accept cookies, tap to select it.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Changing the size of the History list
Because memory on your handheld is often limited, the default limit of the History
list is 500 kilobytes. You can increase or decrease the size.
To change the size of the History list:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
3. Tap General.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
280
4. In the Max. History Size field, enter a new maximum size, in kilobytes.
NOTE Remember that most Palm OS® handhelds have a limited amount of
memory (usually 8 megabytes). Choose a History list size that lets you store at
least a few pages, but still leaves room on your handheld for other data and
applications. A value of at least 50 kilobytes is recommended.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing Palm Web Browser
281
Controlling how Palm Web Browser accesses the Internet
Because some wireless Internet Service Providers (ISPs) charge by the amount of
data you download, Palm Web Browser is careful to limit how often it accesses the
Internet. If you have a faster or more permanent connection to the Internet (such
as a wireless Ethernet attachment), the default settings should work for you.
If you have a slower or more expensive Internet connection, you can enable two
settings that prevent Palm Web Browser from accessing the Internet unless you
approve.
To change connection settings:
1. Press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
3. Tap Connecting.
4. Tap the check box next to one of the following options to enable or disable that
option:
By default, both of these options are disabled (that is, there are no checks in the
check boxes).
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Viewing web content with plug-ins
Some web pages require special Palm OS applications, called plug-ins, to display
their contents. Plug-ins are Palm OS applications that you install and that work
with Palm Web Browser to display web page content. For instance, a plug-in might
help you display a file type that Palm Web Browser doesn’t normally support;
another plug-in might retrieve your address from Address Book to help you fill in
a form.
Finding and installing plug-ins
If a web page requires a plug-in, the page is likely to provide a link to let you
download the plug-in directly to your handheld. Like other Palm OS applications,
the plug-in appears in the Applications Launcher.
Plug-ins can only be used by Palm Web Browser. Tapping a plug-in’s icon in the
Applications Launcher gives you information about that plug-in.
Ask before
connecting Palm Web Browser notifies you before it accesses the
Internet.
Offer old content
if available Palm Web Browser displays old pages from its History list
instead of retrieving pages from the Internet, even if the old
pages are outdated. Old pages display a banner to let you
know how old they are.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
282
To download and install a plug-in:
1. Tap the link to download the plug-in.
NOTE If you download a Palm OS application (PRC) or Palm OS database
(PDB), Palm OS recognizes the file and installs it. On Palm OS software version
4.0 and later, a dialog box like the following appears:
2. If a confirmation dialog box appears, tap Yes to confirm the download.
Uninstalling plug-ins
Uninstall plug-ins in the same way you uninstall other Palm OS applications.
To uninstall a plug-in:
1. Press Home .
2. Press Function + Menu .
3. Tap Delete in the App menu.
4. Tap the name of the plug-in you want to delete.
5. Tap Delete.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Tap Yes.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Finding the Palm Web Browser version number
Palm Web Browser may use specialized Palm OS applications to help it display
web content. Some of these applications may only be compatible with a particular
version of Palm Web Browser.
To find the Palm Web Browser version number:
1. In Applications Launcher, press Function + Menu .
2. Tap Info in the App menu.
3. Tap Version.
4. Scroll down until you see the item Web. The number next to this item is the Palm
Web Browser version number.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Palm Web Browser menus
283
NOTE The Version list may include other items related to Palm Web Browser,
including Web Library, and Web Panel. (You may even see multiple copies of some
items.) Ignore these items when determining the Palm Web Browser version number.
Palm Web Browser menus
Palm Web Browser menus are shown here for your reference, and Palm Web
Browser features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Page menu
Options menu
History Opens the History list, where you can view the sites you most
recently accessed.
Info Opens the Web Page Info dialog box enabling you to view the
name, URL, and size of the current web page.
Bookmark URL Bookmarks the current page.
Bigger Text / Smaller
Text Increases or reduces the size of the screen text.
About Web Browser Shows version information about Palm Web Browser.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 15 Using Palm™ Web Browser
284
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
285
CHAPTER 16
Using World Clock
World Clock enables you to view the current time and date in multiple
locations and to set an alarm. Use World Clock to do the following:
■View the current time and date in three locations.
■Open a preferences screen where you can set the time and date for all the
applications on your handheld.
■Set an alarm.
■Set Daylight Saving options.
To open World Clock and view the time:
1. Press Home .
2. Select the World Clock icon .
TIP Select on the navigator, and then tap Go to Clock.
Setting the primary location
You can use World Clock to select the Location and Date & Time for the primary
location. Keep in mind that the primary Location settings are system date and time
and that these settings are used by all the applications on your handheld. The
primary Location settings also appear in the Date & Time Preferences screen.
Similarly, if you change the settings in the Date & Time Preferences screen, those
settings become your system date and time and also appear under the primary
Location in World Clock. The primary Location settings also serve as a point of
reference for the secondary locations.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock
286
The following procedures show you how to set the Location and Date & Time from
within World Clock. See “Date and Time preferences” in Chapter 18 for details on
setting these preferences.
To set the Location:
1. Tap the primary location pick list.
2. Tap the location you want to use as the primary location.
The location you select is typically a large city in the same time zone as the one
where you live. If an appropriate choice does not appear in the list, see “Adding
a location” later in this chapter to create a new location.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To set the date:
1. Tap Set Date & Time.
2. Tap the Set Date box.
3. Tap the arrows or press Right and Left on the navigator to select the current
year.
4. Tap the current month.
5. Tap the current date.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Primary location
pick list
Tap to set date
Tap
arrows
to
select
year
Tap to
select
month
Tap to select date
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Setting the primary location
287
To set the time:
1. Tap Set Date & Time.
2. Tap the Set Time box.
3. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.
4. Tap each number of the minute, and then tap the arrows to change them.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Choosing a different primary location
If you travel to another location and you want alerts to appear based on local time,
you need to change the primary location to update the system time. You may,
however, prefer to use the secondary locations to view the local date and time, and
leave the primary location set to your home location.
To change the primary location:
1. Tap the pick list next to the current primary location.
2. Select the location you want to use as the new primary location.
If the new location is in another time zone, World Clock automatically updates the
date and time in all the applications on your handheld.
Tap to set time
Primary
location
pick list
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock
288
Setting the secondary locations
The secondary locations display the date and time in two locations other than the
primary location. You can use the secondary locations to view the time in places to
which you travel or you need to contact people.
The date and time in the secondary locations are based on the Date & Time in the
primary location.
To select the secondary Locations:
1. Tap the pick list next to the secondary location.
2. Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location.
If an appropriate location does not appear in the list, see the next section “Adding
a location” to create a new location.
Adding a location
If an appropriate location does not appear in the Location pick list, you can add a
new location to the list, and if necessary adjust the time zone and Daylight Saving
settings. If you activate the Daylight Saving options, the time change automatically
occurs at 1:00 AM on the selected start and end dates.
To add a location:
1. Tap the Location pick list.
2. Select Edit List.
3. Tap Add.
4. Select a location that is in the same time zone as the city you want to add.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
6. (Optional) Tap the Name field and modify the Location name.
Secondary
location
pick list
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Adding a location
289
7. (Optional) Tap the Time Zone box and select a time zone.
8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
9. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
To set Daylight Saving options:
1. From the Edit Location dialog box, tap the This location observes Daylight
Saving Time check box to select it.
2. Tap the Start box.
3. Tap the month when daylight saving begins.
4. Tap the Week pick list.
5. Select the week when daylight saving begins within the selected month.
6. Tap the Day pick list.
7. Select the day of the week when daylight saving begins within the selected
week.
8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
9. Tap the End box and repeat steps 3 through 8 to select when daylight saving
ends.
10. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock
290
Modifying a Location
If you add a location and later realize you did not use the correct settings, you can
modify the location.
To modify a Location:
1. Tap a Location pick list.
2. Select Edit List.
3. Select the location you want to modify.
4. Tap Edit.
5. Adjust the settings. See “Adding a location” earlier in this chapter for details.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
7. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Removing a location
If you no longer need a location that appears on the Location list, you can remove
it from the list. You cannot remove a location that is currently assigned to the
primary location.
To remove a Location:
1. Tap a Location pick list.
2. Select Edit List.
3. Select the location you want to remove.
4. Tap Remove.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to confirm deletion.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Setting an alarm
In addition to setting and displaying the Date & Time, World Clock also provides
a convenient travel alarm feature. You can set an alarm to sound during the next
24-hour period.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using World Clock menus
291
To set an alarm:
1. Tap the box next to the Alarm icon to open the Set Alarm dialog box.
2. Tap the time columns to set the hour and minute.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
4. When the alarm reminder message appears, do one of the following:
– Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to permanently dismiss the
reminder and return to the current screen.
– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. An
attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind you
of the pending alarm, and the reminder message appears again in five
minutes. When the reminder message reappears, the current time is
displayed in the Reminder bar and the alarm time appears on the screen.
5. Tap Go To to open World Clock.
Using World Clock menus
World Clock menus are shown here for your reference, and World Clock features
that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 16 Using World Clock
292
Options menu
Display Options Opens a dialog box where you can choose which information
appears on the World Clock screen.
Show Multiple Locations. Activates the secondary location
displays. When it is selected, the secondary locations appear
below the primary location.
Show Date. Activates the date display. When it is selected, the
date appears below the time for each location.
Alarm
Preferences Sound. Sets the sound of the alarm. The choices are Alarm,
Bumble Bee, Reveille, Sonata, Wake Up, and Warbler.
Volume. Defines how loud the alarm sounds. The choices are
Low, Medium, and High.
About World
Clock Shows version information for World Clock.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
293
CHAPTER 17
Performing HotSync® Operations
HotSync® technology enables you to synchronize data between one or more
Palm OS® handhelds and Palm™ Desktop software or another PIM such as
Microsoft Outlook. To synchronize data, you must connect your handheld and
Palm Desktop software. You can synchronize your data by placing your handheld
in the cradle/cable attached to your computer or using your wireless local area
network (LAN). You can also use infrared communications or a modem.
Selecting HotSync setup options
You can choose when you want HotSync Manager to run. If necessary, you can
adjust the local and modem HotSync settings as well.
To set the HotSync options on a Windows computer:
1. Click the HotSync icon ™ in the Windows system tray.
2. Select Setup.
3. Click the General tab and select one of the following options:
Always available Adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and
constantly monitors the communication port for
synchronization requests from your handheld. With this
option, the HotSync Manager synchronizes data even when
Palm Desktop software is not running.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
294
If you’re not sure which option to use, keep the default setting: Always
available.
4. If you are using a serial cradle/cable, click the Local tab to display the settings
for the connection between your computer and the handheld cradle/cable, and
adjust the following options as needed.
If you are using the USB cradle/cable, you do not need to use the settings on the
Local tab for a direct HotSync operation.
5. Click the Modem tab to display the modem settings and adjust the options as
needed. See “Using File Link” later in this chapter for more information.
6. If you are attached to a network, click the Network tab to display the network
settings and adjust the options as needed. For more information, see
“Conducting network HotSync operations” later in this chapter.
7. Click OK.
Available only
when Palm
Desktop software
is running
Starts HotSync Manager and monitors requests
automatically when you open Palm Desktop software.
Manual Monitors requests only when you select HotSync Manager
from the Start menu.
Serial Port Identifies the port that HotSync Manager uses to
communicate with the cradle/cable. You can change the port
selection.
Your handheld cannot share this port with an internal modem
or other device.
Speed Determines the speed at which data is transferred between
your handheld and Palm Desktop software. Try the As Fast
As Possible rate first, and adjust downward if you experience
problems. This setting allows Palm Desktop software and
your handheld to find and use the fastest speed.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Customizing HotSync application settings
295
To set the HotSync options on a Mac:
1. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
2. Click the HotSync Controls tab and select any of the following options.
3. Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
Customizing HotSync application settings
For each application, you can define a set of options that determines how records
are handled during synchronization. These options are called a conduit. By default,
a HotSync operation synchronizes all files between the handheld and Palm
Desktop software.
In general, you should leave the settings to synchronize all files. The only reason
you might want to change these settings is to overwrite data on either your
handheld or Palm Desktop software, or to avoid synchronizing a particular type of
file because you don’t use it.
In addition to the conduits for Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Memo Pad,
and Note Pad, Palm Desktop software includes System and Install conduits, as
well as conduits for the VersaMailTM application. The System conduit backs up the
system information stored on your handheld, including ShortCuts. The Install
conduit installs add-on applications on your handheld. The conduit for the
VersaMail application enables you to select e-mail accounts to synchronize. The
VersaMail application is optional and is not installed on all handhelds.
HotSync
Enabled/
Disabled
Activates the HotSync software and prepares your computer
to synchronize with your handheld. By default, the transport
monitor is enabled whenever you start your computer.
Enable HotSync
software at
system startup
Activates the transport monitor automatically each time you
start your computer. If this option is not selected, you must
open HotSync Manager and select the Enabled option before
you can perform a HotSync operation.
Show more detail
in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is
generated when you perform a HotSync operation.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
296
To customize HotSync application settings on a Windows computer:
1. Click the HotSync icon in the Windows system tray (lower-right corner of
the taskbar).
You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software
menu bar.
2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Custom.
3. Select the appropriate username from the list.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list.
5. Click Change, and do one of the following:
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To
use a new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set as default box. Thereafter,
whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default
button in the Custom dialog box.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Done to activate your settings.
To customize HotSync application settings on a Mac computer:
1. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder.
2. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
3. From the User pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list.
VersaMail Set synchronization options. Click Configure Accounts to
change e-mail account settings. The VersaMail application
is optional and is not installed on all handhelds.
Other applications For each application, click the direction in which you want
to write data, or click Do Nothing to skip data transfer for
an application.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Conducting network HotSync operations
297
5. Click Conduit Settings.
6. For each application, click the direction in which you want to write data, or click
Do Nothing to skip data transfer for an application.
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To
use a new setting on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. Thereafter, whatever
you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync operations.
7. Click OK.
8. Close the Conduit Settings window.
Conducting network HotSync operations
When you use the network HotSync technology, you can take advantage of the
LAN and WAN connectivity available in many office environments. Network
HotSync technology enables you to perform a network HotSync operation using
any one of the following methods:
■802.11b radio
■Using a cradle/cable that is connected to any computer on your LAN or WAN
(provided that the computer connected to the cradle/cable also has the network
HotSync technology installed, your computer is on, and the HotSync Manager
is running).
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
298
Connecting to your computer through a wireless local area network (LAN)
A network HotSync operation requires the following (consult your system
administrator for assistance):
■Your computer has TCP/IP support installed.
■Your computer is available on a broadband network, such as a company
network or DSL.
IMPORTANT Dial-up modem connection is not supported.
To prepare your computer for a network HotSync operation:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
2. From the HotSync Manager menu, verify that Network is selected. If Network
is selected, there is a check mark next to it. If Network is not selected, click on
Network to select.
3. From the HotSync Manager menu, select Setup.
4. Click the Network tab and make sure your user name has a checkmark next to
it. If the checkmark is not there, click the check box next to your user name.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Conducting network HotSync operations
299
5. If your user name does not appear, click New, enter your user name and
click OK.
6. Click OK.
7. Perform one of the following:
– Put your handheld in the cradle/cable, and perform a HotSync operation.
The HotSync operation records network information about your computer
on your handheld. With this information, your handheld can locate your
computer when you perform a HotSync operation over the network. You are
ready to perform a network HotSync.
– Perform a network HotSync operation. You will need to go through a setup
procedure on your handheld.
Performing a wireless network HotSync operation
After you prepare your computer and select your Conduit Setup options, you are
ready to perform a wireless network HotSync operation.
IMPORTANT You must first install the Palm Desktop software that came with your
Tungsten C handheld before your attempt a network HotSync operation. Your
computer must have the software installed to communicate with your handheld.
If you already performed a cradle/cable HotSync operation, you are ready for
network HotSync operation with no further preparation needed.
If you did not perform a cradle/cable HotSync operation, you must set up from
your handheld.
To perform a wireless network HotSync operation:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the HotSync icon .
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
300
3. Tap Network and then tap the HotSync icon.
To set up your handheld during the first HotSync operation:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the HotSync icon .
3. Tap Network and then tap the HotSync icon.
4. Tap Next.
Tap here to start a
network HotSync
operation
Tap Network
Tap here to start
Tap Network
Tap Next
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations
301
5. Select your desktop computer and tap Add.
6. Tap the HotSync icon .
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations
The simplest way to synchronize data is to perform a direct HotSync operation by
placing your handheld in the cradle/cable and pressing the HotSync button.
Performing a cradle/cable HotSync operation: Windows computer
The first time you synchronize your data, you need to enter user information on
Palm Desktop software. After you enter this information and synchronize, the
HotSync Manager recognizes your handheld and doesn’t ask for this information
again.
If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users,
you may want to create a user profile. See “Using File Link” later in this chapter
before performing the following steps.
IMPORTANT You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct
connection, or with infrared communication, rather than using a modem or network.
Tap Next
Tap here to start a
network HotSync
operation
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
302
The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop
software. If you have not installed this software, see the Palm™ Montana™ Read
This First installation guide for instructions.
To perform a local HotSync operation on a Windows computer:
1. Place your handheld in the cradle/cable.
2. If the HotSync Manager is not running, start it: On the Windows desktop, click
Start, and then choose Programs. Navigate to the Palm Desktop software
program group and choose HotSync Manager. Alternatively, you can start the
Palm Desktop software, which automatically opens the HotSync Manager.
3. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.
IMPORTANT The first time you perform a HotSync operation, you must enter a
username in the New User dialog box and click OK. Every handheld should have
a unique name. To prevent loss of a user’s records, never try to synchronize more
than one handheld to the same username.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations
303
The HotSync Progress dialog box appears and synchronization begins.
4. Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete.
After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your handheld from the
cradle/cable. Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle, and then lift it up
to remove it.
Performing a direct HotSync operation: Mac computer
When you installed Palm Desktop software, you entered a username. This
username is the connection between your handheld and your computer.
The first time you perform a HotSync operation the Palm Desktop software does
the following:
■Adds a username to your handheld.
■Creates a folder for the username in the Users folder inside the Palm folder
inside the current Mac user’s Documents folder. For example, if you entered
Jane Garcia as your username, a folder called Jane Garcia is created in the Users
folder.
■Creates a file named User Data in your username folder.
Usernames appear in the User pop-up on the right side of the toolbar. You can
change users by selecting a new name in the pop-up menu.
Each subsequent time you perform a HotSync operation, HotSync Manager reads
the username from your handheld and synchronizes the data in the folder of the
same name.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
304
Be sure you select the correct username from the User pop-up before entering data
on Palm Desktop or performing a HotSync operation.
If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users,
you may want to create a user profile. See “Creating a user profile” later in this
chapter before performing the following steps.
IMPORTANT You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct
connection, or with infrared communication.
The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop
software. See the Palm™ Montana™ Read This First installation guide if you have
not installed this software.
To perform a local HotSync operation on a Mac computer:
1. Place your handheld in the HotSync cradle/cable.
2. Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled: Double-click the HotSync Manager
icon in the Palm folder. Click the HotSync Controls tab and make sure the
Enabled option is selected.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations
305
3. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.
The HotSync Progress dialog box appears, followed by the Select User dialog
box.
4. In the Select User dialog box, select the username you entered when you
installed the Palm Desktop software, and click OK.
The HotSync Progress dialog box reappears, and synchronization begins.
5. Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete.
After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your handheld from the
cradle/cable. Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle, and then lift it up
to remove it.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
306
Conducting IR HotSync operations
You can use the infrared (IR) port on your handheld to perform HotSync
operations. When you perform an IR HotSync operation, you don't need your
cradle/cable. However, you must have a computer that’s equipped with an IR port
and that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the Infrared Data Association
(IrDA) standards. This is especially useful if you travel with an infrared-enabled
laptop. You simply enable infrared communication on your laptop and handheld
and follow the steps in “Performing an IR HotSync operation” later in this section.
Preparing your computer for infrared communication
Before you can perform a HotSync operation using the IR port, the computer with
which you want to synchronize must fulfill these requirements:
■Your computer must support the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA
standards.
■Your computer must have an enabled infrared port that’s built into the
computer, or an enabled infrared device attached to the computer.
■Some desktop computers may require an infrared device attached to a physical
COM port. Laptops are likely to have a built-in IR port, so no external device is
necessary.
■Your computer must have an installed infrared driver.
■If you have an external infrared device attached to your computer, a driver is
probably included with the device. Consult the documentation included with
the device for information on installing the required driver.
Check your computer’s documentation to learn if the computer supports infrared
communication.
To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Windows computer:
■Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray, and make sure
that Infrared is checked.
– If you have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu, and that
option is selected, skip to “Performing an IR HotSync operation.”
– If you do not have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu,
complete the following steps:
a. Make sure that Local Serial is selected on the menu.
b. From the HotSync Manager menu, select Setup.
c. Click the Local tab.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Conducting IR HotSync operations
307
d. In the Serial Port drop-down box, select the simulated port that your
computer uses for infrared communication.
See the documentation for your operating system for instructions on finding
the simulated port. This information is usually located in the Control Panel.
–Click OK.
NOTE If your cradle/cable is connected to a USB port, you can continue using it while
HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication. If your cradle/cable is
connected to a serial port, you cannot use your HotSync cradle/cable again until you
reconfigure the HotSync Manager to communicate with the port defined for cradle/
cable synchronization.
To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Mac computer:
1. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
2. In the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.
3. Click the Connection Settings tab.
4. Select the On check box next to IR Port.
5. Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
308
Performing an IR HotSync operation
After you complete the steps to prepare for performing an IR HotSync operation,
it’s easy to perform the actual operation.
To perform an IR HotSync operation:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the HotSync icon .
3. Tap Local.
4. Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to PC/Handheld.
5. Position the IR port of your handheld within a couple of inches of the infrared
port of your computer.
6. Tap the HotSync icon to start the IR HotSync operation.
Returning to cradle/cable HotSync operations
It’s easy to return to using the cradle/cable for HotSync operations.
If your cradle/cable is connected to a USB port, you can continue using it while
HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication. Use the following
instructions to return to Local USB cradle/cable HotSync operations only when
necessary, such as when you have disconnected the cradle/cable from the
USB port.
To return to local USB cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer:
1. If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to the USB port of the computer you use
for HotSync operations.
2. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray, and select
Local USB if it is not already selected.
Tap here to start IR
HotSync operation
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Using File Link
309
To return to local serial cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer:
1. If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to the port of the computer you use for
HotSync operations.
2. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
3. Choose Setup, and then click Local.
4. Select the COM port where your cradle/cable is connected.
5. Click OK.
To return to local serial cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Mac computer:
1. If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to a serial port on your computer.
2. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
3. In the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.
4. Click the Connection Settings tab, and select the correct connection.
5. Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
The next time you want to perform a HotSync operation, just press the HotSync
button on the cradle/cable, as you always did before.
Using File Link
The File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad
information onto your handheld from a separate external file such as a company
phone list. HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category on your Palm
Desktop software and on your handheld. You can configure the File Link feature
to check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation.
With File Link you can import data stored in any of the following formats:
■Comma-separated (*.csv)
■Memo Pad archive (*.mpa)
■Address Book archive (*.aba)
■Text (*.txt)
For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.
NOTE The File Link feature is not available in Palm Desktop software for Mac.
Creating a user profile
A user profile enables you to install the same set of data onto multiple Palm OS
handhelds before each handheld is individualized with a specific user name and
data file.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
310
A handheld that is preconfigured with a user profile can be given to anyone
because the handheld is not yet identified by a unique user name. The handheld
acquires a unique user name when the new user performs his or her first local
HotSync operation.
For example, suppose a sales organization wants to distribute two dozen
handhelds that each have a common company phone list, a set of memos, and
several key applications. A user profile can be created to install the common data
before the handhelds are distributed to the employees who will use them. Then
when the employees perform their first HotSync operation, the common data
becomes part of their individual data file.
NOTE The handhelds that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new
ones that have never been synchronized or handhelds that have had their user names
and data removed by a hard reset.
To create a user profile on a Windows computer:
1. Open Palm Desktop software.
2. From the Tools menu, select Users.
3. Click Profiles.
4. Click New.
5. Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for each profile that you want to create, and then click
OK to return to Palm Desktop software.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Creating a user profile
311
7. Select the profile from the User list, and create the data for the profile (for
example, a company phone list).
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
312
To create a user profile on a Mac computer:
1. Open Palm Desktop software.
2. From the User pop-up menu, select Edit Users.
3. Click New Profile.
4. Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK.
5. Close the Users window.
6. From the User pop-up menu, select the new profile.
7. Create the data for the profile (such as a company phone list).
8. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
9. Select the conduit settings for the profile. See “Customizing HotSync
application settings” earlier in this chapter for details.
Performing the first HotSync operation with a user profile
After you create a user profile, you are ready to transfer the information to the new
handheld during the first HotSync operation.
To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation on a Windows computer:
1. Place the new handheld in the cradle/cable.
2. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.
3. Click Profiles.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Creating a user profile
313
4. Select the profile you want to load on the handheld, and click OK.
5. Click Yes to transfer all the profile data to the handheld.
The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software prompts
you to assign a username to the handheld.
To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation on a Mac computer:
1. Connect the new handheld to the HotSync cradle/cable.
2. Press the HotSync button on the cradle/cable.
3. Select the profile you want to load on the handheld, and click OK to transfer all
the profile data to the handheld.
The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software prompts
you to assign a username to the handheld.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 17 Performing HotSync® Operations
314
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
315
CHAPTER 18
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
The Preferences screens enable you to customize the configuration options on your
handheld, including the following:
General Preferences
Date and Time Set the date, time, time zone, and Daylight Saving switch.
Digitizer Calibrate the screen on your handheld.
Formats Set the country default and the formats for dates, times,
calendar, and numbers.
Keyboard Configure your keyboard functions.
On-Screen
Writing Enable or disable full-screen GraffitiTM writing.
Power Set these features: auto shutoff interval, Stay on in cradle, and
Beam Receive.
Sounds and alerts Set these features: sounds, vibrator, and indicator light.
Communication Preferences
Connection Configure cradle, modem, and infrared communication
settings.
Network For advanced users: Configure your handheld for use with
TCP/IP services or with an ISP.
VPN Configure your VPN accounts on your handheld.
Wi-Fi Turn on the 802.11b radio and set up your Wi-Fi network.
Personal Preferences
Buttons Reassign different applications to the buttons on the front panel
of your handheld, and the HotSync® button on the cradle.
Colors Set a color theme for the display.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
316
Viewing Preferences
You can select preferences using the stylus or using the five-way navigator.
To open the Preferences screens:
1. Press Home .
2. Tap the Preferences icon .
3. Select a functional area and then select the Preferences screen you want to view.
4. Scroll down to access any third-party preferences.
NOTE This chapter does not describe third-party preferences. See the
documentation for the third-party application for information.
Owner Assign your name, phone number, and other owner
information to your handheld.
Security Set the security features for your handheld.
ShortCuts Define a list of abbreviations.
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Buttons preferences
317
Buttons preferences
The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to associate different applications with
the buttons on the front of the handheld.
Any changes you make in the Buttons Preferences screen become effective
immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or application.
If you assign a different application to a button, you can still access the original
application using the Applications Launcher.
To change the Buttons preferences:
1. Tap the pick list next to the button you want to reassign.
2. Select the application that you want to assign to the button.
Connection preferences
The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define the settings used to
connect your handheld to other devices. The screen displays a list of available
configurations that are ready to be further defined; the list varies depending on the
kind of software you’ve added to your handheld.
You can also create custom configurations, which include the following:
Tap arrow to
show pick list
Tap Default to restore all of the
buttons to their factory settings
PC via Cradle/Cable: A local HotSync connection; the direct
connection between your handheld and your desktop computer.
Your handheld is connected by its universal connector to the
cradle, and the cradle is attached by its cable to a USB port of
your desktop computer. (If you are using the optional serial
cradle, the cradle attaches by its cable to a serial [COM] port of
your computer.)
Modem via Universal Connector: A cable connection between
your handheld’s universal connector and a modem for dialing in
to a modem that is part of your computer or laptop.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
318
IR to PC connection
The following example shows you how to edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection
to adjust the communication speed; you can similarly edit other connections or
settings or create a custom connection. You can use the IR to PC/Handheld
connection to perform a remote IR HotSync operation. To accomplish the HotSync
operation, your handheld sends data through its IR port to an IR port in your
desktop computer, to synchronize with your Desktop application.
To edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection:
1. Tap the IR to PC/Handheld connection and tap Edit.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed.
4. Enter the initialization string supplied by the documentation for the modem
attached to your mobile phone, if necessary.
PC via Infrared: A connection between the IR port of your
handheld and the infrared device of your computer or laptop.
Modem via Infrared: A connection between the IR port of your
handheld and a modem. The modem can be attached to or
within a mobile phone or some other device containing an IR
port. (Some IR phones contain modems.)
Need
screenshot
Tap
Details
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Date and Time preferences
319
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
6. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK again to save the configuration.
After you create the configuration, you need to set up the HotSync Manager of
your Desktop application and the HotSync application of your handheld to
perform a modem HotSync operation.
Date and Time preferences
The Date and Time Preferences screen enables you to set the date, time, time zone,
and Daylight Saving option on your handheld.
To set the date:
1. Tap the Set Date box.
2. Tap the arrows to select the current year.
3. Select a month.
4. Tap the current date.
To set the time:
1. Tap the Set Time box.
2. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.
3. Tap each number of the minute, and then tap the arrows to change the numbers.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Tap to set date
Tap arrows to
select year
Tap or use the
navigator to select
month
Tap to select date
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
320
To set the time zone:
1. Tap the Location pick list.
2. Select a time zone.
When you travel, changing the time zone setting to a new time zone
automatically resets the date and time on your handheld, but it does not change
the time of appointments set in Date Book.
Digitizer preferences
The Digitizer Preferences screen opens the digitizer calibration screen. This is the
same screen that appears when you start your handheld for the first time.
You can recalibrate your screen after a hard reset, or if your digitizer drifts.
Formats preferences
Use the Formats Preferences screen to set the country default and the display
format of the dates, times, and numbers on your handheld.
Country default
The country default sets date, time, week start day, and number conventions based
on geographic regions where you might use your handheld. For example, in the
United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United
States, on the other hand, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or
PM suffix.
All your handheld applications use the Country default settings. You can,
however, customize your own preferences as described in “Time, date, week start,
and numbers formats” later in this chapter.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Sounds and Alerts preferences
321
To set the country default:
■Tap the Preset to pick list and select a country.
Time, date, week start, and numbers formats
The Time setting defines the format for the time of day. The time format that you
select appears in all applications on your handheld.
To select the time, date, week start, and numbers format:
1. Tap the Time pick list and select a format.
2. Tap the Date pick list and select a format.
3. Tap the Week starts pick list, and select whether you want the first day of the
week to be Sunday or Monday.
This setting controls the Day, Week, and Month views in Date Book and all other
aspects of your handheld that display a calendar.
4. Tap the Numbers pick list, and select formats for the decimal point and
thousands separator.
Sounds and Alerts preferences
The Sounds and Alerts preferences screen enables you to set the alarm options and
sounds for your handheld.
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
322
System, alarm, and game sounds
Your handheld uses a variety of sounds. The System, Alarm, and Game Sound
settings enable you to turn the sounds on or off, and to adjust the volume level.
To set the system and alarm sounds:
1. Tap the System Sound pick list and select the sound level.
IMPORTANT When you turn off the System Sounds, you also turn off the “chime”
tones associated with the HotSync operation.
2. Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select the sound level.
3. Tap the Game Sound pick list and select the sound level.
The Game Sound setting works only with games that are programmed to
respond to this setting. Older games typically do not respond to this setting.
Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings
You can set alarms in Date Book, Note Pad and World Clock to remind you of
important meetings or notes. When you enable the Alarm Vibrate and indicator
light settings, your handheld vibrates and the indicator light blinks to notify you
of alarms. This is useful whenever you want to turn the Alarm Sound off but still
be notified of alarms.
To set the Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings:
1. Tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list and select On or Off.
2. Tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On or Off.
Keyboard Preferences
The Keyboard Preferences screen enables you to customize the keyboard. You can
set how each key responds when pressed or held. You can also remap the character
or function of the key.
Any changes you make in the Keyboard Preferences screen become effective
immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or application.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Keyboard Preferences
323
To set the key repeat rate:
■Move the slider or tap the adjustment bar.
To set key clicking:
■Tap check box to enable or disable key clicking.
To set key press-and-hold functionality:
■Tap the Press and hold key pick list, and select the function.
Remapping keys
Keys can be remapped from their default function to any of the keys or buttons
available on the handheld, including the Function keys.
Move the slider
Tap the adjustment bar
Tap check box
Tap pick list and select function
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
324
To remap a key:
1. Tap Remap keys.
2. Tap a key.
3. Tap Remap.
You can chose to remap the key and the Function + key combination.
4. Tap Save.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap Done.
Tap a key
Mapping function
Tap to remap Function + key combination
Tap to remap key
Tap pick list and select keyboard
Tap character
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences
325
Network preferences
CAUTION Network preference settings are for advanced users only. Changing your
Network preferences settings affects you handheld’s ability operate in a wireless
environment. Use the Wi-Fi preference settings to change your network settings. See
“Wi-Fi preferences” later in this chapter.
Your handheld supports 802.11b data connections and acts as a fully functional
data modem for circuit-switched connections over GSM.
Modem Accessory and TCP/IP software
Although your handheld is wirelessly enabled, you can also use TCP/IP software
that is included in the handheld operating system to connect with Internet Service
Providers (ISPs) or dial-in (remote access) servers.
To use TCP/IP, you must create a configuration in Connection Preferences and
then create Network Preferences settings.
The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define several ways that your
handheld can use a modem to communicate with remote devices. For example,
you can communicate with the service provider server, or with your computer if
you are traveling. See “Connection preferences” earlier in this chapter for a
complete explanation of how to create modem configurations.
After you configure both the Connection and Network Preferences, you can
establish a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) connection with your service provider or
dial-in server. You can do this either by using menu commands from the Network
Preferences screen or by using a third-party application.
NOTE TCP/IP provides the ability to connect to your service provider or dial-in server
with applications that allow you to view the transmitted data. Visit the web site
www.palm.com/support/intl for information on third-party applications that take
advantage of TCP/IP.
Selecting a service
Use the Service setting to select the service template for your service provider or a
dial-in server. Service templates are a set of service provider and dial-in server
configuration settings that you can create, save, and reuse. Also, you can create
new service templates. See “Creating additional service templates” later in this
chapter.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
326
To select a service:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
2. Select the predefined service template you want to use.
Entering a username
The User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log in to your service
provider or your dial-in server. Although this field can contain multiple lines of
text, only two lines appear onscreen.
To enter a username:
1. Tap the User Name field.
2. Enter your username.
NOTE Most dial-in servers do not accept spaces in the username.
Entering a password
The Password box identifies the password you use to log in to your server or
service provider. Your entry in this field determines whether your handheld
prompts you to enter a password each time you log in to your network:
■If you do not enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Prompt” in
this field and asks you to enter a password during the login procedure.
■If you enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Assigned” in this
field and does not prompt you to enter a password during the login procedure.
Tap here to display a
list of service
templates
Enter your username here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences
327
If you are concerned about security, select the Prompt option and do not enter a
password.
To enter a password:
1. Tap the Password box.
2. Enter the password you use to log in to your server.
.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
The Password field updates to display the word “Assigned.”
Selecting a connection
Use the Connection setting to select the method you want to use to connect to your
service provider or a dial-in server. See “Connection preferences” earlier in this
chapter for information about creating and configuring connection settings.
To select a connection:
1. Tap the Connection pick list.
2. Select the connection you want to use.
Adding telephone settings
Some services require a telephone number. When you select the Phone field, a
dialog box opens in which you define the telephone number you use to connect
Enter password here
Tap here
Tap here to display a
list of available
connections
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
328
with your service provider or dial-in server. In addition, you can define a prefix,
disable call waiting, and give special instructions for using a calling card.
To enter your server phone number:
1. Tap the Phone field.
2. Enter the phone number for your service provider or dial-in server.
3. If you need to enter a prefix or disable call waiting, skip to those procedures.
Otherwise, press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Entering a prefix
A prefix is a number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside
line. For example, many offices require that you dial “9” before dialing a number
outside the building.
To enter a prefix:
1. Tap the Dial prefix check box to select it.
2. Enter the prefix.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Disabling call waiting
Call waiting can cause your session to terminate if you receive a call while you are
connected. If your telephone has call waiting, you need to disable this feature
before logging in to your service provider or dial-in server.
Enter the phone number here
Enter your
prefix here
Select this
box if you
need to use a
prefix
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences
329
To disable call waiting:
1. Tap the Disable call waiting check box to select it.
2. Enter the code to disable call waiting on the Disable call waiting line.
Each telephone company assigns a code to disable call waiting. Contact your
local telephone company for the code that is appropriate for you.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Using a calling card
The Use calling card field enables you to use your calling card when dialing your
service provider or Intranet server. Keep in mind that there is usually a delay
before you enter your calling card number. When you define your calling card
number, you need to add commas at the beginning to compensate for this delay.
Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds.
To use a calling card:
1. Tap the Use calling card check box to select it.
2. Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line.
NOTE The Phone Setup dialog box works correctly for AT&T and Sprint long-
distance services. However, because MCI works differently, MCI customers
need to put the calling card number in the Phone # field and the phone number
in the Use calling card field.
TIP It’s a good idea to add at least three commas before your calling card
number to compensate for the cue delay.
Enter your disable
code here
Select this
box if you
need to
disable call
waiting
Enter your
calling card
number here
Select this
box to use a
calling card
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
330
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Connecting to your service
After you set your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection
to your service provider or your company’s network (dial-in server) is easy.
To establish a connection:
■Tap Connect to dial the current service and display the Service Connection
Progress messages.
To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press the lower half of
the Scroll button.
To close a connection:
■Tap Disconnect to terminate the connection between your handheld and your
service.
Creating additional service templates
You can create additional service templates from scratch, or you can duplicate
existing templates and editing information. After you create a new or duplicate
template, you can add and edit settings.
To add a new service template:
■Press Command Stroke + N.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select New on the
Service Menu.
An Untitled service template is added to the Service pick list.
To duplicate an existing service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
2. Select the predefined service template you want to duplicate.
3. Press Command Stroke + L.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Duplicate on the
Service Menu.
A copy of the service template is added to the Service pick list.
Adding detailed information to a service template
If you are using one of the predefined service templates, you probably need to
enter only your username and telephone number. If you are creating a new service
template, you may need to provide additional information to your service
provider or dial-in server. You use the Details dialog box to add more information
to a selected service template.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences
331
To add connection details:
1. Tap the service field.
2. Tap Details.
Idle timeout The Idle timeout setting defines how long your handheld waits before dropping
the connection with your service provider or dial-in server when you switch out of
a TCP/IP application.
To set the Idle timeout:
1. Tap the Idle timeout pick list and select one of the following options:
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Selecting Next Service
Next Service allows you to automatically try another connection method when the
primary method fails. If the current connection fails, then a connection to the
selected service is attempted. If you do not want to try another service connection,
select None.
To select the Next Service:
■Tap the Next Service pick list and select a service.
1 minute Waits one minute for you to open another application before it
drops the connection.
2 minutes Waits two minutes.
3 minutes Waits three minutes.
Never Maintains your PPP or SLIP connection until you turn off your
handheld (or until it times out).
CAUTION By enabling this option, you may incur significant
charges if the connection to your service provider is left open.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
332
Defining primary and secondary DNS
The Domain Naming System (DNS) is a mechanism in the Internet for translating
the names of host computers into IP addresses. When you enter a DNS number (or
IP address) you are identifying a specific server that handles the translation
services.
Each IP address has four sections, separated by periods. In the Details dialog box,
you enter each section separately. Each section of an IP address is made up of a
number from 0 to 255; numbers are the only allowable characters in this field.
Ask your service provider or system administrator for the correct primary or
secondary DNS IP numbers.
Many systems do not require that you enter a DNS. If you are not sure, leave the
DNS field blank.
To enter a primary and secondary DNS:
1. Tap the Query DNS check box to deselect it.
2. Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field, and then
enter the first section of the IP address.
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3. Repeat step 2 for the second, third, and last sections of the Primary DNS field.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the secondary DNS number.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
IP address Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier (an IP
address), whether permanent or temporary. Some networks dynamically assign a
temporary IP address when clients log in. The IP Address field lets you identify
whether your network provides automatic (dynamic) temporary IP addressing.
If your IP address is permanently assigned, you need to get that information from
your system administrator. If you are not sure, select Automatic.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences
333
To identify dynamic IP addressing:
■Tap the IP Address check box to select it.
To enter a permanent IP address:
1. Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and display a permanent IP address
field below the check box.
2. Tap the space to the left of the first period, and then enter the first section of the
IP address.
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Login scripts A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network
server—for example, your corporate network or your wireless service provider.
A login script is associated with a specific service template created in Network
Preferences.
A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system
administrator if your company has a system in which you log in to the corporate
servers from your handheld using a modem or network connection. The script is
generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need
it. It automates the events that must take place in order to establish a connection
between your handheld and the corporate servers.
Tap to select automatic IP
address
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
334
You can create login scripts from the Login Script dialog box on your handheld,
accessed from the Details dialog box in Network Preferences.
NOTE You can also use non-ASCII and literal characters in your login script.
Creating a login script on your handheld
You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in
the Login Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply
additional information. Those commands have a parameter field so that you can
add the necessary data.
To create a login script:
1. Tap Script.
2. Tap the End pick list.
3. Select the command you want from the Command list. If the command requires
additional information, a field appears to the right of it for you to enter the
information. The following commands are available:
Tap here to see the list of
available commands
Wait For Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the
TCP/IP server before executing the next command.
Tap here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Network preferences
335
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the login script is complete.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Plug-in applications
You can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the
functionality of the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard
PRC application that you install on your handheld just like any other application.
After you install the plug-in application, you can use the new script commands in
a login script.
Plug-in applications have the following characteristics:
■Written in C language
■Compiled into a device executable
■Called properly from a login script
■Able to return control to a login script after it terminates
Wait For
Prompt Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the server
and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value.
You then enter the challenge value into your token card, which
in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your
handheld. This command takes two arguments, separated by a
vertical bar (|) on the input line.
Send Transmits specific characters to the TCP/IP server to which you
are connecting.
Send CR Transmits a carriage return or LF character to the TCP/IP server
to which you are connecting.
Send User ID Transmits the user ID information entered in the User ID field of
the Network Preferences screen.
Send
Password Transmits the password entered in the Password field of the
Network Preferences screen. If you did not enter a password,
this command prompts you to enter one. The Password
command is usually followed by a Send CR command.
Delay Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before
executing the next command in the login script.
Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your
handheld. This command is used with SLIP connections.
Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter text of some kind
(for example, a password or a security code).
End Identifies the last line in the login script.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
336
■Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS® software,
such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior for Palm Platform.
For additional information on creating plug-in applications, send e-mail to Palm
Developer Support at devsupp@palm.com.
Deleting a service template
There is only one way to delete a service template: use the Delete command from
the Service menu.
To delete a service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
2. Select the service template you want to delete.
3. Press Command Stroke + D.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Delete on the
Service Menu.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Network preferences menu commands
The Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it fast and easy
to create and edit service templates. See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for more
information about choosing menu commands.
Service menu
Options menu
View Log
The Network Log lists all of the communication that occurs between your modem
and your dial-in server during the login procedure. The information in the
Network Log can help your service provider or your system administrator
pinpoint where the login procedure communication fails and why.
On-Screen Writing preferences
Palm On-screen Writing offers you the option of using the full screen to enter text.
You can enter Graffiti characters anywhere on the screen using the same stroke
used within the Graffiti silkscreen region. Letters are written on the left side of the
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
On-Screen Writing preferences
337
screen and numbers are written on the right side of the screen. On screen controls
can still be accessed by tapping and holding the control until it activates.
IMPORTANT See “Using Graffiti writing to enter data” in Chapter 3 for instructions
on using Palm On-screen Writing.
Enabling Palm On-screen Writing
Palm On-screen Writing can be enabled and disabled from the preferences screen
or from the edit menu within an application. For information on using the edit
menu option, see “Enabling and disabling Palm On-screen Writing” in Chapter 4.
To use on-screen controls, tap and hold the control until the control is activates.
To enable or disable Palm On-screen Writing:
■Tap the On or Off button.
Displaying penstrokes
You have the option to have the penstroke display as you are writing the Graffiti
character.
1. Tap the On button to display the Show penstrokes check box.
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
338
2. Tap the Show penstrokes check box to enable or disable.
Owner preferences
The Owner Preferences screen enables you to record a name, company name,
phone number, or any other information that you want to associate with your
handheld. This information can be from the business card created during
installation.
If you use the Security Preferences screen to turn off and lock your handheld with
a password, information that you put in the Owner Preferences is displayed the
next time you turn on your handheld.
To enter the Owner preferences:
■Enter the text that you want to associate with your handheld in the Owner
Preferences screen. If you enter more text than can fit on one screen, a scroll bar
automatically appears on the right side of the screen.
If you assign a password with the Security Preferences screen, the information in
the Owner Preferences screen cannot be changed. In this case, an Unlock button
appears at the bottom of the screen.
To unlock the Owner Preferences screen:
1. Tap Unlock.
2. Enter the password that you defined in the Security Preferences screen.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Power preferences
339
Power preferences
The Power preferences screen enables you to set the auto shutoff interval, and the
Beam Receive feature.
Auto-off delayYour handheld has an automatic shutoff feature that activates after a period of
inactivity. This feature turns off the power and backlight but leaves the radio on.
This feature helps conserve battery power in case you forget to turn off your
handheld.
If you find that your handheld shuts itself off before you finish reviewing the
information on the screen, you should increase the time setting of the automatic
shutoff feature.
To set the Auto-off delay:
1. Tap the Auto-off After pick list.
2. Select the setting you want to use for the automatic shutoff feature: 30 seconds,
1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes.
Cradle settingsYou can choose to leave your handheld on when it is in the cradle during a
HotSync operation, or when you are recharging the battery, so you can continue to
view your data.
To change the cradle setting:
■Tap the Stay on in Cradle check box to leave your handheld on when it is in the
cradle.
Beam ReceiveYou can choose to turn off the Beam Receive feature. This prohibits anyone from
beaming information to your handheld. It also results in a slight saving of battery
power.
To change the Beam Receive setting:
■Tap the Beam Receive pick list and select On or Off.
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
340
Security preferences
Your handheld comes with a Security feature so that unauthorized users cannot
view the entries you wish to protect. Use the Security feature to do the following:
■Lock and turn off your handheld so that it does not operate until you enter the
correct password.
■Mask all records that you mark as private so the information appears grayed
out.
■Hide all records that you mark as private so they do not appear on any screen.
■Encrypt records.
You can mask and hide private records with or without a password. Without a
password, private records are hidden or masked until you set the Security
preference to show them. With a password, you must enter the password to view
the private entries.
Assigning a password
You can assign a password to protect your private records and to lock your
handheld. To quickly logon, you can also assign a short quick password that only
works at your first logon attempt.
To assign a password:
1. Tap the Password box.
2. Enter a password.
3. Enter a hint to help your remember your password if you forget it. This is
optional.
4. Enter a quick password. This is optional.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
6. Enter the same password a second time, and press Function + Enter , or
tap OK.
Tap here Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences
341
Changing or deleting a password
Once you define a password for your handheld, you can change or delete it at any
time. You must enter the current password before you can change or delete it.
To change or delete your password:
1. Tap the Password box.
2. Enter the current password.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
4. Do one of the following:
– To change the password, hint, or quick password, enter the new information,
and press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
– To remove the password, tap Unassign.
Locking your handheld
You can lock your handheld so that it cannot be operated until your password is
entered. In the event that your handheld is lost or stolen, this helps protect your
data from unauthorized use. You can set your handheld to lock automatically, or
you can lock it manually.
Locking your handheld automatically
You can set your handheld to lock automatically when any one of the following
occur:
Tap here
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
342
■When you turn off the power
■At a time you specify
■After a period of inactivity you specify
To set your handheld to lock when you turn it off:
1. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
2. Enter your password.
3. Select On power off.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To set your handheld to lock at a preset time:
1. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
Tap here
Tap here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences
343
2. Enter your password.
3. Select At a preset time, and then use the arrows to set the time.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To set your handheld to lock after a period of inactivity:
1. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
2. Enter your password.
3. Select After a preset delay.
4. Enter the inactive period, and then select Minute(s) or Hour(s) from the pick list.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Tap here
Tap to select Minutes or Hours
Enter the amount of time
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
344
IMPORTANT If you lock your handheld, you must enter the exact password to
reactivate your handheld. If you forget the password, your handheld will present the
hint you have entered to help you remember the password. If you still cannot
remember the password, you must perform a hard reset to resume using your
handheld. Performing a hard reset deletes all the records in your handheld; however,
you can restore all synchronized data at the next HotSync operation. See “Performing
a hard reset” in Appendix A for more information.
Locking your handheld manually
You can turn off and lock your handheld manually. When the handheld is locked,
you can only make emergency calls by pressing the four application buttons
simultaneously.
To lock and turn off your handheld:
1. Tap Lock & Turn Off.
2. To use your handheld, turn it on and then enter the password.
Recovering from a forgotten password
IMPORTANT Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries and files marked
as Private.
If you forget your password, your handheld displays the password hint, if you
entered one, to help you remember the password. If you are still unable to
remember the password, you can delete it from your handheld.
IMPORTANT If you synchronize with your computer before deleting a forgotten
password, your handheld restores your private entries the next time you perform a
HotSync operation, but it does not restore the password.
Tap Lock
and Turn
Off
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences
345
To delete a forgotten password:
1. Tap the Password box.
2. Tap Lost Password.
3. Tap Delete Password.
Making records private
In many applications, you can make individual records private. Private records
remain visible and accessible, however, until you select the Security setting to hide
or mask all private records. Masked records appear as grey placeholders in the
same position they would appear if they were not masked, and are marked with a
lock icon. Hidden records disappear completely from the screen. If you define a
password for your handheld, you must enter it to display private records.
Tap here
Tap here
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
346
To hide all private records:
1. Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Hide Records.
.
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to confirm that you want to hide
private records.
To mask all private records:
1. Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Mask Records.
2. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK to confirm that you want to mask
private records.
Tap Hide
Records Need
screenshot
Tap Mask
Records
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences
347
To display all private records:
1. Do one of the following:
– Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records.
– If you do not have a password, hidden and masked records become visible.
If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. Go to
step 2.
2. Enter your password.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Hiding your records automatically
You can set your handheld to automatically hide records when any one of the
following occur:
■When you turn off the power
■At a time you specify
■After a period of inactivity you specify
To hide your records when you turn your handheld off:
1. Select Automatic.
Select
Show
Records
Need
screenshot
Select Automatic
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
348
2. Enter your password.
3. Select On power off.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To automatically hide records at a preset time:
1. Select Automatic.
2. Enter your password.
3. Select At a preset time, and then use the arrows to set the time.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Need
screenshot
Select Automatic
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences
349
To automatically hide your records after a period of inactivity:
1. Select Automatic.
2. Enter your password.
3. Select After a preset delay.
4. Enter the inactive period, and then select Minute(s) or Hour(s) from the pick list.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Masking your records automatically
You can set your handheld to automatically mask records when any one of the
following occur:
■When you turn off the power
■At a time you specify
■After a period of inactivity you specify
Select Automatic
Need
screenshot
Tap to select Minutes or Hours
Enter the amount of time
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
350
To mask your records when you turn your handheld off:
1. Select Automatic.
2. Enter your password.
3. Select On power off.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To automatically mask records at a preset time:
1. Select Automatic.
2. Enter your password.
Select Automatic
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
Select Automatic
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences
351
3. Select At a preset time, and then use the arrows to set the time.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To automatically mask records after a period of inactivity:
1. Select Automatic.
2. Enter your password.
3. Select After a preset delay.
4. Enter the inactive period, and then select Minute(s) or Hour(s) from the pick list.
5. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Need
screenshot
Select Automatic
Need
screenshot
Tap to select Minutes or Hours
Enter the amount of time
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
352
To unmask individual records:
1. Select a masked record.
2. Do one of the following:
– If you do not have a password, a masked record becomes visible.
– If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. Go to
step 3.
3. Enter your password.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To make a record private:
1. Display the entry that you want to make private.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Private check box.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Setting security options
You can set security options that allow you to further customize how your
handheld handles security features.
Masking your password entry
Masking your password entry secures your password against accidental viewing
by another person. The password only shows asterisks.
To mask your password entry:
1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.
2. Tap the check box for Mask password entry
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Tap here
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Security preferences
353
Setting the quick password delay time limit
You can set quick password delay time limit to accommodate your personal
preference. After the delay limit has been reached, you must enter the full
password. For more information about the quick password, see “Changing or
deleting a password” earlier in this chapter.
To set the quick password delay time limit:
1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.
2. Tap the check box for Quick password delay time limit.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Encrypting your data
You can encrypt selected data whenever your handheld locks. The more
applications and data that is selected, the longer it takes to encrypt.
To encrypt your data when the handheld locks:
1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.
2. Tap the Options pick list and select Encryption.
3. Tap the check box for Encrypt data when locked.
4. Tap Choose Applications button.
Tap here
Enter delay time limit
Need
screenshot
Tap pick list and select Encryption
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
354
5. Select the applications whose data you want to encrypt.
6. If you want to encrypt only private records, select Encrypt private records only.
7. Tap the Encryption type pick list and select a type.
8. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Using security shortcuts
You can create shortcuts to activate certain security features, such as locking the
handheld or masking private records. To activate the shortcuts, press Function
+ ShortCut + shortcut key.
To create and activate security shortcuts:
1. Press Function + Menu and then select Security Options.
2. Tap the check box for the security shortcut you want to activate.
Need
screenshot
Tap pick list and select type
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
ShortCuts preferences
355
3. If you want to change the current character, tap and drag the stylus to select the
character and type in new character.
ShortCuts preferences
The ShortCuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for entering
text. This section describes how to create, edit, and delete a ShortCut.
Creating a ShortCut
You can create a ShortCut for any words, letters, or numbers. All ShortCuts you
create appear on the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen. All the ShortCuts are
available in any of your handheld applications and are backed up on your
computer when you perform a HotSync operation.
To create a ShortCut:
1. Tap New.
2. On the ShortCut Name line, enter the letters you want to use to activate the
ShortCut.
3. Select the ShortCut Text area and enter the text that you want to appear when
you write the ShortCut characters.
TIP You may want to add a space (space character) after the last word in your
ShortCut text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text.
Tap to select application
Change the shortcut key
Need
screenshot
Tap New
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
356
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
To use a ShortCut, press Press Function + ShortCut followed by the
ShortCut characters. The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to
show that you are in ShortCut mode.
Editing a ShortCut
After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.
To edit a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to edit.
2. Tap Edit.
3. Make the changes you want.
4. Press Function + Enter , or tap OK.
Deleting a ShortCut
If you no longer need a ShortCut, you can delete it from the list of ShortCuts.
To delete a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to delete.
2. Tap Delete.
3. Press Function + Enter , or tap Yes.
VPN preferences
The VPN Preferences enables you to configure your VPN account, and connect and
disconnect to your account. This section describes how to configure an account and
connect to your account.
ShortCut
symbol
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
VPN preferences
357
Connecting to your VPN account
You can connect to your VPN account from the preferences screen or from the
application.
To connect to your VPN account:
1. Tap the Connect button.
2. Enter your password if you have chosen not to store the password for the
account.
3. Tap the Disconnect button when you are finished accessing the account.
Tap here
Need
screenshot
Enter password if you have chosen
not to store it on the handheld
Need
screenshot
Tap here Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
358
Configuring your VPN account
You can set up and edit your VPN account. You can also manually edit a TCP/IP
connection.
To set up your VPN account:
1. Tap the Account button to begin the setup wizard.
2. Fill out the information required by each screen.
To edit your VPN account or add a new account:
1. Tap the Account button and select Edit Accounts.
2. Select the account and tap Add or Edit.
Tap here
Need
screenshot
Select Edit
Accounts Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences
359
3. Tap Next.
4. Perform one of the following:
– Add or edit the information on the screens.
– Tap Advanced to edit encryption setting and TCP/IP addresses.
Wi-Fi preferences
Wi-Fi preferences allows you to configure your 802.11b network settings and view
network status.
Turning the 802.11b radio on and off
The Wi-Fi preferences screen allows you to turn the 802.11b radio on and off. It also
indicates what network you are connected to and if you are out of range.
NOTE If the Signal indicates that there are no networks within range, the 802.11b
radio continues to check for a network until you turn the radio off. If you move to an
area that is within range and the radio is on, Wi-Fi automatically connects.
To turn on or off the 802.11b radio:
■Tap Wi-Fi pick list and select On or Off.
Tap here
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
Tap pick list
and select
On
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
360
Finding Wi-Fi connection information
Your IT administrator may need your MAC address. The Wi-Fi Info screen shows
you the address and other Wi-Fi information.
To view Wi-Fi information:
■Tap Info.
The Wi-Fi Info screen only shows the MAC address when you are disconnected.
Conserving battery power
You can extend your battery power by selecting the Conserve power option. This
option dynamically adjusts the coverage area and polling rate to use less power.
To conserve battery power:
■Tap Conserve power.
Adding and editing a Wi-Fi connection
You can add a new Wi-Fi network connection or edit an existing connection. The
connections can be a infrastructure access point type connection, such as network
Tap here
Tap here
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences
361
connections found on company sites, or the connection can be a peer-to-peer or ad-
hoc connection, such as a laptop that acts as an access point for your handheld.
To add or edit an infrastructure access point Wi-Fi network:
1. Tap Wi-Fi in the Preferences main screen.
2. Tap the Network pick list and select Edit Network.
3. Perform one of the following:
– Select a network and tap Edit.
–Tap Add
4. Edit or add the information.
5. Perform one of the following:
Select Edit Network
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
362
– Tap OK if you want the IP and DNS addresses automatically retrieved or you
do not want to change the IP or DNS addresses.
– Tap Details to manually set your IP or DNS addresses.
6. Tap Advanced.
7. Tap the IP Address or DNS Server pick list and select manual.
8. Add the addresses and tap OK.
You can also chose to use a short preamble by checking the Use short preamble
check box.
Tap Advanced
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences
363
To add or edit a peer-to-peer (ad-hoc) Wi-Fi network:
1. Tap Wi-Fi in the Preferences main screen.
2. Tap the Network pick list and select Edit Network.
3. Perform one of the following:
– Select a network and tap Edit.
–Tap Add
4. Edit or add the information.
5. Tap Details.
Select Edit Network
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
364
6. Tap the connection type pick list and select Peer-to-peer (ad-hoc).
7. Tap the Channel pick list and select the channel number.
8. Perform one of the following:
– Tap OK if you want the IP and DNS addresses automatically retrieved.
– Tap Advanced to manually set your IP or DNS addresses.
9. Tap the IP Address or DNS Server pick list and select manual.
10. Add the addresses and tap OK.
Tap Advanced
Need
screenshot
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi preferences
365
You can also chose to use a short preamble by checking the Use short preamble
check box.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Chapter 18 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
366
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
367
APPENDIX A
Maintaining Your Handheld
This appendix provides information on the following:
■Proper care of your handheld
■Prolonging battery life
■Resetting your handheld
■Removing and installing your SIM card
Caring for your handheld
Your handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide years of
trouble-free service. Please observe the following general tips when using your
handheld:
■Take care not to scratch the screen of your handheld. Keep the screen clean.
When working with your handheld, use the supplied stylus or plastic-tipped
pens intended for use with a touch-sensitive screen. Never use an actual pen or
pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the handheld screen.
■Your handheld is not waterproof and should not be exposed to rain or moisture.
Under extreme conditions, water may enter the circuitry through the front
panel buttons. In general, treat your handheld as you would a pocket calculator
or other small electronic instrument.
■Take care not to drop your handheld or subject it to any strong impact. Do not
carry your handheld in your back pocket: if you sit on it, you may damage it.
■Protect your handheld from temperature extremes. For example, do not leave
your handheld on the dashboard of a car on a hot day or on a day when
temperatures are below freezing, and keep it away from heaters and other heat
sources.
■Do not store or use your handheld in any location that is extremely dusty, damp,
or wet.
■Use a soft, damp cloth to clean your handheld. If the surface of the handheld
screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted
window-cleaning solution.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld
368
Battery considerations
Please note the following considerations for the battery in your handheld:
■Under normal conditions, you can keep your handheld battery charged by
placing it in the cradle between 30 and 60 minutes each day. You can conserve
battery life by changing the Auto-off setting that automatically turns the
handheld off after a period of inactivity and by selecting the Conserve Power
option in Wi-Fi preferences. See “Auto-off delay” in Chapter 18 and see “Wi-Fi
preferences” in Chapter 18 for more information.
■If the battery becomes low in the course of normal use, an alert appears on the
handheld screen describing the low battery condition. If this alert appears,
perform a HotSync® operation to back up your data; then leave your handheld
in the cradle to recharge the unit. This helps prevent accidental data loss.
■If the battery becomes too low, the wireless operations are disabled to save
battery strength.
■If the battery drains to the point where your handheld does not operate, it stores
your data safely for about five days. In this case, there is enough residual energy
in the battery to store the data, but not enough to turn on your handheld. If your
handheld does not turn on when you press the power button, you should
recharge the unit immediately. The battery may not have enough residual
energy to power the indicator light, which normally displays green when
charging.
■If your battery drains and you have the unit in an uncharged state for an
extended period of time, you can lose all of the stored data.
■There are no serviceable parts inside your handheld, so do not attempt to open
the unit.
■If you ever dispose of your handheld, please dispose of it without damaging the
environment. Take your handheld to your nearest environmental recycling
center.
Resetting your handheld
Under normal circumstances, you will not have to use the reset button. On rare
occasions, however, your handheld may no longer respond to buttons or the
screen. In this case, you need to perform a reset to get your handheld running
again.
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it’s doing and start over again. All
records and entries stored in your handheld are retained with a soft reset. After a
soft reset, the Welcome screen appears, followed by the Date and Time Preferences
screen (to set date and time).
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Resetting your handheld
369
To perform a soft reset:
■Use the reset tip tool, or the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object
without a sharp tip), to gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back
panel of your handheld.
TIP The metal and plastic stylus that comes with your handheld has a reset tip
inside. To use it, unscrew the barrel from the stylus quill.
Performing a hard reset
With a hard reset, all records and entries stored in your handheld are erased. Never
perform a hard reset unless a soft reset does not solve your problem.
NOTE You can restore any data previously synchronized with your computer during
the next HotSync operation.
To perform a hard reset:
1. Hold down the power button on the front panel of the handheld.
2. While holding down the power button, use the reset tip tool, or the tip of an
unfolded paper clip (or similar object without a sharp tip), to gently press and
release the reset button.
3. Wait for the Palm Powered™ logo to appear; then release the power button.
4. When a message appears on the handheld screen warning that you are about to
erase all the data stored on your handheld, do one of the following:
– Press Up on the navigator to complete the hard reset and display the
Digitizer screen.
– Press any application button to perform a soft reset. (Pressing a keyboard key
has no effect.)
NOTE With a hard reset, the current date and time are retained. Formats
Preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default settings.
Reset button
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld
370
To restore your data from a Windows computer after a hard reset:
1. Click the HotSync icon ™ in the Windows system tray (lower-right corner of
the taskbar).
You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm™ Desktop software
menu bar.
2. From the HotSync Manager menu, select Custom.
3. Select the appropriate username from the list.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list.
5. Click Change, and select Desktop overwrites the handheld.
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To
use a new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set As Default box. Thereafter,
whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default
button in the Custom dialog box.
6. Click OK.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to change conduit settings for other applications.
8. Click Done to activate your settings.
9. Perform a HotSync operation.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Resetting your handheld
371
To restore your data from a Mac computer after a hard reset:
1. Double-click the HotSync Manager in the Palm folder.
2. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
3. From the Users pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.
4. Select an application from the list.
5. Click Conduit Settings.
6. Click Macintosh overwrites handheld.
NOTE Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next
HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default
settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, click Make Default.
Thereafter, whatever you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync
operations.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other applications.
9. Close the Conduit Settings window.
10. Perform a HotSync operation.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld
372
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
373
APPENDIX B
Frequently Asked Questions
If you encounter a problem with your handheld, do not call technical support until
you have reviewed the following list of frequently asked questions and you have
also reviewed the following:
■This handbook
■The Palm™ Montana™ Read This First that came with your handheld
■The README file located in the folder where you installed the Palm™ Desktop
software on your Windows computer or on your installation CD for Macintosh
users
■The Palm Desktop online Help
■The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide located in the
Documentation folder on your installation CD
■The Palm Knowledge Library, accessible at www.palm.com/support/ under the
Support section
■The most recent Tungsten C handheld HelpNotes on your regional web site
If you are still having problems, contact Technical Support. See the Customer
Support card that comes with your handheld, or go to www.palm.com/support/.
NOTE Thousands of third-party add-on applications have been written for Palm OS®
handhelds. Unfortunately, we are not able to support such a large number of third-
party applications. If you are having a problem with a third-party application, please
contact the developer or publisher of that software.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
374
Software installation problems
Problem Solution
The Palm Desktop Installer
Menu did not appear when I
inserted the CD-ROM into my
Windows computer.
1. Click the Start button.
2. Choose Run from the Start menu.
3. Click Browse.
4. Locate your CD-ROM drive and select the autorun.exe
file.
5. Click Open.
6. Click OK.
I cannot install Palm Desktop
software on my Windows
computer.
Try the following:
1. Disable any virus scanning software on your computer.
2. Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE and end all tasks except Systray
and Explorer.
If a dialog box with buttons appears instead of a list of
tasks, click the Task List button and then end all tasks
except Systray and Explorer.
3. Make sure your computer has at least 30MB of disk space
available.
4. Delete all temporary files.
5. Run ScanDisk on your computer.
6. Reinstall Palm Desktop software.
I cannot install Palm Desktop
software on a Mac computer. Try the following:
1. Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer.
2. Quit any open applications.
3. Make sure your computer has at least 25MB of disk space
available.
4. Reinstall Palm Desktop software.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Operating problems
375
Operating problems
Problem Solution
I don’t see anything on my
handheld’s screen. Try each of these in turn:
■Press an application button to ensure your handheld is
turned on.
■Press Function + Brightness . If the Brightness
dialog box appears, adjust the brightness by holding down
the up scroll button for a few seconds. If this doesn’t work,
hold the down scroll button for a few seconds.
■If your handheld was exposed to cold, make sure it is at
room temperature.
■Recharge the unit.
■Perform a soft reset. If your handheld still doesn’t turn on,
perform a hard reset. See “Resetting your handheld” in
Appendix A.
IMPORTANT With a hard reset, all records and entries stored
in your handheld are erased. Never perform a hard reset
unless a soft reset does not solve your problem. You can
restore any data previously synchronized with your computer
during the next HotSync® operation.
My battery doesn’t charge. ■Make sure the power outlet is active and the HotSync
cradle is properly plugged in.
■If the battery does not hold a charge, return your handheld
to an authorized Palm service center.
I get a warning message telling
me my handheld memory is
full.
■Purge records from Date Book and To Do List. This deletes
To Do List items and past Date Book events from the
memory of your handheld. See “Purging records” in
Chapter 4. You may need to perform a HotSync operation
to recover the memory.
■Delete unused memos and records. If necessary, you can
save these records. See “Deleting records” in Chapter 4.
■If you have installed additional applications on your
handheld, remove them to recover memory.
See “Removing applications” in Chapter 4.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
376
Tapping and writing problems
My handheld keeps turning
itself off. Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of
inactivity. This period can be set at one, two, or three minutes.
Check the Auto-off setting. See “Auto-off delay” in
Chapter 18.
My handheld is not making
any sounds. Check the System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings.
See “System, alarm, and game sounds” in Chapter 18.
My handheld’s indicator light
is not blinking when alarms
occur.
Check the Alarm LED setting. See “Alarm Vibrate and
indicator light settings” in Chapter 18.
My handheld does not vibrate
when alarms occur. Check the Alarm Vibrate setting. See “Alarm Vibrate and
indicator light settings” in Chapter 18.
My handheld has frozen. Perform a soft reset. See “Resetting your handheld” in
Appendix A.
My handheld appears to freeze
when I place it near my
computer.
Move your handheld away from the computer’s infrared port.
Problem Solution
When I tap the buttons or
screen icons, my handheld
activates the wrong feature.
Calibrate the screen. See “Digitizer preferences” in
Chapter 18.
When I tap the buttons,
nothing happens. If you have enabled Palm On-screen Writing, you need to tap
and hold the button or other on-screen control until it
activates. This delay keeps the handheld activating a control
while you are writing a Graffiti character.
When I press Function +
Menu , or tap the Menu bar
nothing happens.
Not all applications or screens have menus. Try changing to a
different application.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Application problems
377
Application problems
I can’t get my handheld to
recognize my handwriting. ■Make sure you have turned on Palm On-screen Writing.
See “On-Screen Writing preferences” in Chapter 18.
■For your handheld to recognize handwriting input with the
stylus, you need to use Graffiti writing. See “Using Graffiti
writing to enter data” in Chapter 3.
■Write Graffiti strokes for letters in the left side and the
strokes for numbers in the right side of the screen.
■Make sure that Graffiti is not shifted into extended or
punctuation modes. See “Using Graffiti writing to enter
data” in Chapter 3.
■See “Graffiti tips” in Chapter 3 for tips on increasing your
accuracy when you write Graffiti characters.
Problem Solution
I tapped the Today button, but
it does not show the correct
date.
Your handheld is not set to the current date. Make sure the Set
Date box in the Date and Time Preferences screen displays the
current date. See “Date and Time preferences” in Chapter 18
for more information.
I know I entered some records,
but they do not appear in the
application.
■Check the Categories pick list (upper-right corner). Choose
All to display all of the records for the application.
■Check Security and confirm that Private Records is set to
Show private records.
■In To Do List, tap Show and see if Show Only Due Items is
selected.
I am having problems listing
memos the way I want to see
them.
■If you cannot manually arrange the order of the memos in
the list screen, check the Memo Preferences setting. Make
sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
■If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm
Desktop software and then perform a HotSync operation,
the memos on your handheld still appear in the order
defined in the Memo Preferences setting. In other words,
the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are
not transferred to your handheld.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
378
HotSync problems
I created an event in Date Book,
but it doesn’t appear in the
Week View.
In the Week View, you cannot select overlapping events that
have the same start time. If you have two or more events with
the same start time, choose the Day View to see the
overlapping events.
My vCard or vCal e-mail
attachment isn’t forwarding
correctly.
Palm Desktop software provides several features that interact
with e-mail client software on a Windows computer. In order
for these features to work correctly, the e-mail client software
must be properly configured. Follow these steps to check the
configuration:
1. Click the Windows Start menu, and then select Settings.
2. Select Control Panel.
3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.
4. Make sure that the E-mail field is set to the correct E-Mail
client software.
5. Click OK.
6. Start the e-mail client software and make sure it is
configured as the default MAPI client. Consult the
documentation for your desktop E-Mail application for
more information.
Problem Solution
I cannot perform a HotSync
operation; what should I check
to make sure I am doing it
correctly?
Make sure the HotSync cradle is connected securely.
On a Windows computer try these steps:
■Check the Windows system tray to make sure the HotSync
Manager is running. If it is not, open Palm Desktop
software.
■Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial, as
appropriate, from the HotSync Manager menu.
■If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you selected the
correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.
It should be set to the port where you connected the
HotSync cradle.
On a Mac computer, try the following:
■Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled. If it is not, double-
click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder and
enable HotSync Manager on the HotSync Controls tab.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
HotSync problems
379
I performed a HotSync
operation, but one of my
applications did not
synchronize.
■On a Windows computer, click the HotSync Manager and
choose Custom. Check that the correct conduit is active.
■On a Mac computer, double-click the HotSync Manager
icon. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and
check that the correct conduit is active.
I am using Outlook as my PIM,
but I cannot do a HotSync
operation.
■Click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom. Check that
the correct conduit is active.
■Check that the correct conduit is installed. Reinstall the
HotSync Manager and make sure the correct conduit is
selected.
I cannot launch the HotSync
Manager. ■If you are using the optional serial cradle, or if you are
performing a HotSync operation using a modem, make
sure you are not running another program, such as America
Online, that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup
dialog box.
■Back up the Palm Desktop software, uninstall it, and then
reinstall it.
I tried to perform a local
HotSync operation, but it did
not complete successfully.
■Make sure your handheld is seated in the cradle correctly.
■Check the connection between the HotSync cradle and the
USB or serial port on your computer.
■Make sure the username you selected in Palm Desktop
software matches the username assigned to your handheld.
■Make sure the date on your computer matches the date on
your handheld.
■Read the HotSync Log for the user account for which you
are performing a HotSync operation.
On a Windows computer, try each step in turn:
■Make sure HotSync Manager is running. If it is running,
close it, and restart it.
■Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial, as
appropriate, from the HotSync Manager menu.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
380
■If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you selected the
correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.
It should be set to the port where you connected the
HotSync cradle.
■If you are using the serial cradle, try a lower baud rate
setting on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.
■If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you aren’t
running a program, such as America Online, that uses the
serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box.
On a Mac computer, try the following:
■Make sure that HotSync Manager is enabled on the
HotSync Controls tab in the HotSync Software Setup
window.
I tried to perform a modem
HotSync operation, but it did
not complete successfully.
Check the following on your computer:
■Make sure your computer is turned on and that it does not
shut down automatically as part of an energy-saving
feature.
■Make sure the modem connected to your computer is
turned on and is connected to the outgoing phone line.
■Make sure the modem you are using with your handheld
has an on-off switch. Your handheld cannot “wake up” a
modem that has an auto-off feature.
■Make sure the modem is connected properly to your
computer and is connected to the incoming phone line.
On a Windows computer, check the following:
■Make sure that Modem is checked in the HotSync Manager
menu.
■Confirm that the Setup String in the Setup dialog box
configures your modem correctly. You may need to select a
different Modem Type or enter a custom Setup String. Most
modems have a Setup String that causes them to send
initial connection sounds to a speaker. You can use these
sounds to check the modem connection.
■Confirm that the Speed setting in the Setup dialog box
works for your modem. If you have problems using the As
Fast As Possible option or a specific speed, try using a
slower speed.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
HotSync problems
381
■Make sure you are not running another program, such as
WinFax, CompuServe, or America Online, that uses the
serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box.
■Make sure your modem resets before you try again. (Turn
off your modem, wait a minute, and then turn it back on.)
On a Mac computer, check the following:
■Make sure that Modem is selected on the Connection
Settings tab in the HotSync Software Setup window.
■You may need to select a different Modem type or enter a
Custom setup string on the Connection Settings tab. Most
modems have a setup string that causes them to send initial
connection sounds to a speaker. You can turn on the
Modem Speaker option and use these sounds to check the
modem connection.
I tried to perform a modem
HotSync operation, but it did
not complete successfully.
(continued)
■Make sure you are not running another program, such as
America Online, fax or telephony software, or AppleTalk
networking, that uses the serial port you selected in the
Serial Port Settings tab.
■Make sure your modem resets before you try again. (Turn
off your modem, wait a minute, and then turn it back on.)
Check the following on your handheld:
■Confirm that the telephone cable is securely attached to
your modem.
■Make sure the dialing instruction dials the correct phone
number.
■If you need to dial an outside line prefix, make sure you
selected the Dial Prefix option on your handheld and
entered the correct code.
■If the telephone line you are using has Call Waiting, make
sure you selected the Disable call waiting option under
Modem Sync Phone Setup on your handheld and entered
the correct code.
■Make sure the telephone line you are using is not noisy,
which can interrupt communications.
■Check the batteries in your modem and replace them if
necessary.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
382
I can’t perform an IR HotSync
operation. ■On a Windows computer, be sure the HotSync Manager is
running and the Serial Port for local operations is set to the
simulated port for infrared communication.
See “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for
details.
■On a Mac, open the HotSync Software Setup window and
be sure that HotSync Manager is enabled and that the IR
Port Connection Setting is set to On. See “Conducting IR
HotSync operations” in Chapter 17 for more information.
■On your handheld, be sure the HotSync application is set to
Local, with the option IR to PC/Handheld.
■Be sure the IR port of your handheld is aligned directly
opposite to, and within a few inches of, the infrared device
of your computer.
■IR HotSync operations do not work after you receive a low
battery warning. Check the battery power of your
handheld. Recharge the internal battery.
When I press the HotSync
button on the cradle, nothing
happens on Palm Desktop
software and my handheld
times out.
■Make a copy of your Palm folder. Uninstall, and then
reinstall, Palm Desktop software.
■Turn on your handheld and press the Home . Tap the
HotSync icon, and then tap Local.
When I perform a HotSync
operation, my information
does not transfer to Palm
Desktop software.
■If you perform a HotSync operation for more than one
device, make sure the correct user is active on the Palm
Desktop software.
■If you have performed a HotSync operation successfully
but you cannot find the data from your handheld on Palm
Desktop software, check to see that you have the correct
user name selected for viewing data.
■On a Windows computer, click the HotSync Manager and
choose Custom. Check that all conduits are set to
synchronize files.
■On a Mac computer, double-click the HotSync Manager
icon. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and
check that the correct conduit is active.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Beaming problems
383
Beaming problems
My handheld displays the
message “Waiting for sender”
when it’s near my computer’s
infrared port.
■Your computer’s infrared port may be set to search
automatically for the presence of other infrared devices.
Consult the documentation for your operating system for
information about turning off this option.
■In some cases, simply moving your handheld away from
the computer’s infrared port solves the problem.
I want to synchronize my
computer with more than one
handheld.
■If the computer running Palm Desktop software
synchronizes with more than one handheld, each handheld
must have a unique name. Assign a username to your
handheld the first time you perform a HotSync operation.
■Please be aware that synchronizing more than one
handheld with the same username causes unpredictable
results and, potentially, loss of your personal information.
Problem Solution
I cannot beam data to another
device with an IR port. ■If you are beaming to another Palm handheld, confirm that
your handheld and the other handheld are between ten
centimeters (approximately 4") and one meter
(approximately 39") apart, and that the path between the
two handhelds is clear of obstacles. Beaming distance to
other devices with an IR port may be different.
■Move your handheld closer to the receiving device.
When someone beams data to
my handheld, I get a message
telling me it is out of memory.
■Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of
memory available as the data you are receiving. For
example, if you are receiving a 30KB application, you must
have at least 60KB free.
■Perform a soft reset. See “Performing a soft reset” in
Appendix A for more information.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
384
Recharging problems
Security and VPN problems
Query: Need more security and VPN problems and solutions.
Problem Solution
When I place my handheld in
the cradle, the indicator light
does not go on.
■Confirm that your handheld is well seated in the cradle.
■Confirm that your recharger cable is properly connected to
the back of the cradle’s USB or serial port connector that
plugs into your computer.
■Confirm that your recharger is plugged into an AC outlet
that has power.
■If you have not used your handheld for a long period, such
as an extended vacation, the battery may not contain
enough charge to power the indicator light. After your
handheld has recharged, the indicator light will function
normally.
Problem Solution
I forgot the password, and my
handheld is not locked. First, use the password hint to try and remember the
password. If this does not help, or if you do not have a
password hint, you can use Security to delete the password,
but your handheld deletes all entries marked as private.
However, if you perform a HotSync operation before you delete
the password, the HotSync process backs up all entries,
whether or not they are marked private. Then you can follow
these steps to restore your private entries:
■Use the Palm Desktop software and the cradle or infrared
communication to synchronize your data.
■Tap Forgotten Password in Security to remove the
password and delete all private records.
■Perform a HotSync operation to synchronize your data and
restore the private records by transferring them from your
computer to your handheld.
I forgot the password and my
handheld is locked. First, use the password hint to try and remember the
password. If this does not help, or if you do not have a
password hint, you must perform a hard reset to continue
using your handheld. See “Performing a hard reset” in
Appendix A for more information.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Wi-Fi problems
385
Wi-Fi problems
Query: Need 802.11b radio and Wi-Fi problems and solutions.
Technical support
If, after reviewing the sources listed at the beginning of this appendix, you cannot
solve your problem, contact your regional technical support office by e-mail,
phone, or fax.
Before requesting support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the
problem. When you do contact support, please be ready to provide the following
information:
■The name and version of the operating system you are using
■The actual error message or state you are experiencing
■The steps you take to reproduce the problem
■The version of handheld software you are using and available memory
■The wireless service provider’s name
■The software version of your 802.11b radio
To find your handheld version and memory information:
1. Press the Home .
2. Press Command Stroke + L.
Alternately, press Function + Menu , and then select Info on the App
Menu.
NOTE Thousands of third-party add-on applications have been written for
Palm OS handhelds. Unfortunately, we are not able to support such a large
number of third-party applications. If you are having a problem with a third-
party application, please contact the developer or publisher of that software.
3. Tap Version to see version numbers, and tap Size to see the amount of free
memory in kilobytes.
To find your wireless service provider’s name and 802.11b radio software version:
1. Press the Home .
2. Tap the Preferences icon .
Problem Solution
■
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
386
3. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
4. Select Mobile.
5. Select Current status.
6. Scroll down to SV number to view the software version of your 802.11b radio.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
387
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
FCC Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
■Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
■Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
■Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
■Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional
peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules.
CAUTION Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the
manufacturer’s Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without written
approval may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States with its action
in Report and Order FCC 96-326 adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio
frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are
consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.
The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy (SAR)
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users MUST use a Palm brand body-
worn accessory during body-worn operation. Use of accessories not provided by Palm or that have
not been tested for RF exposure compliance with this product may not comply with the FCC RF
exposure safety guidelines and should not be used.
FCC Statement
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, this device and its antenna must not be
co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The user of this device
should ensure that the operation of this device is in compliance with these provisions.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
388
Industry Canada
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
Canadian Wireless Regulatory Notice
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian-Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause any interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service,
this device is intended to be operated indoors, and away from windows to provide maximum
shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
Battery Warning
Do not mutilate, puncture, or dispose of batteries in fire. The batteries can burst or explode, releasing
hazardous chemicals.
Varning
Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Advarsel!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverandøren.
Varoitus
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan
suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
Advarsel
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type
anbefait av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Waarschuwing!
Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar
inleveren als KCA.
Palm™ Tungsten™ C Product Family
Tested to Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Responsible Party:
Palm, Inc.
400 N. McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, California 95052
United States of America
(408) 503-7500
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
389
Uwaga
Intrinsic Safety Warning
Warning - Explosion Hazard
Substitution of component may impair suitability for Class I, division 2.
Warning - Explosion Hazard
When in hazardous location, turn off power before replacing or wiring modules.
Warning - Explosion Hazard
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-
hazardous.
Wireless Notices - Usage Cautions
In some situation, the use of the wireless device may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply
abroad airplanes, in hospitals, near explosive environments, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are
not certain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization first prior
to turning on the device.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
390
Declaration of Conformity
English
Hereby, Palm Solutions Group, declares that this 802.11B PDA is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Finnish
Palm Solutions Group vakuuttaa täten että 802.11B PDA tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/
EYoleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Dutch
Hierbij verklaart Palm Solutions Group dat het toestel 802.11B PDA in overeenstemming is met de
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
European Union Notice
CE Declaration of Conformity
Application of Council Directive(s):
89/336/EEC (EMC directive), 99/5/EC (R&TTE directive), 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)
Standards to which Conformity is Declared:
EN55022
EN301-489-1/-17
EN300-328
EN55024
EN60950
EN50360/50361
Digital Device Emissions (Class B)
Radio Device EMC
Radio Equipment Emissions
Digital Device EMC
Product Safety
SAR Safety
Manufacturers Name: Palm Solutions Group
Manufacturers Location: 400 North McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035-5112
USA
Importers Name: Palm Germany GmbH
Importers Location: Landsberger Strasse 155
D-80687 Munchen
Germany
Type of Equipment Handheld Computer
Model Number: Tungsten C
Year of Manufacture: 2002
I, the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above
conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s)
Place: Santa Clara, CA David Woo
Date: 10-28-02 Global Compliance Manager
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
391
Bij deze verklaart Palm Solutions Group dat deze 802.11B PDA voldoet aan de essentiële eisen en aan
de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
French
Par la présente Palm Solutions Group déclare que l'appareil 802.11B PDA est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Par la présente, Palm Solutions Group déclare que ce 802.11B PDA est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables.
Swedish
Härmed intygar Palm Solutions Group att denna 802.11B PDA står I överensstämmelse med de
väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevantabestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Danish
Undertegnede Palm Solutions Group erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr 802.11B PDA overholder
de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
German
Hiermit erklärt Palm Solutions Group, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses 802.11B PDA in
Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften
der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi)
Hiermit erklärt Palm Solutions Group die Übereinstimmung des Gerätes 802.11B PDA mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderenrelevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG.
(Wien)
Greek
Need text.
Italian
Con la presente Palm Solutions Group dichiara che questo 802.11B PDA è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Spanish
Por medio de la presente Palm Solutions Group declara que el 802.11B PDA cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Portuguese
Palm Solutions Group declara que este 802.11B PDA está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e
outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
392
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
393
Index
A
ABA (Address Book archive file) 32
Accented characters, Graffiti writing 27
Account. See E-mail account
Action icons 264
Adding a bookmark 270
Add-on applications 63–70
Address Book
*If Found Call* entry 75
adding custom fields 78
adding e-mail address from 192
adding entry from e-mail 220
archive files (.aba) 32
business card for beaming 30
categorizing records 51
conduit for synchronizing 295
creating records 47
deleting records 49
displaying category 78
displaying data in the Address list 76
finding records 14, 55
fonts 61
menus 77
notes for records 60
opening 73
overview 73
private records 352
sorting records 59
using to address e-mail 192
Addressing e-mail
displaying another address 150, 156,
164, 246
message 191–194
using Smart Addressing 193
Advanced preferences 216
Agenda (Date Book view) 98
Alarm
LED setting 322
lists 62
preset 101
setting in Clock 291
setting in Date Book 92
setting in Note Pad 118
sound 101, 292, 322, 376
vibrate setting 322
Alarm sound 174
Alerting for new mail 172
Alphabet
Graffiti writing 24
APOP
adding to an account 245, 248, 249
and synchronization 225
requirement 144, 244
Application buttons 9, 37, 74, 87, 317
Applications
Address Book 73
beaming 29–31
Calculator 79
Card Info 83
categories 39–40
Clock 285
copying text to other 275
Date Book 87
downloading 268
Expense 103
font style 61
installing 63–69
Launcher 37–41
Memo Pad 111
Note Pad 115
opening 37
Palm Photos 121
plug-in 281, 335
preferences for 46
removing 69
security 340
supporting Palm Web Browser 282
To Do List 135
viewing as icons 40
viewing as list 40
See also Add-on applications
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
394
Applications Launcher 281, 282
Archive files
importing data from 32
for main applications 32
saving deleted records 49
saving purged records 50
Attaching a signature to messages 151, 157,
164
Attachments
downloading 219
icon for 180
selecting plug-ins 233
sending 194
using Documents To Go 232–233
Autofill, enabling or disabling 278
Automatic fill, in Expense 110
Auto-off delay 339
Autotext 15
Autotext. See Graffiti ShortCuts
B
Backing up e-mail databases 254
Backlight 8
adjusting 12
Banner
old content 264, 269, 281
saved page 274
Battery
conserving power 339
doesn’t charge 375
gauge 37
life and use 368
recycling 368
warning 388–390
Bcc field 191
See also Blind copies
Beaming
location of IR port 8
problems with 383
See also Infrared
Beep for new mail 171
Blind copies 150, 151, 156, 157, 164, 191, 246
Blinking asterisk 171
Bold font for text 61
Bookmarks
adding 270
deleting 272
editing 271
visiting pages 271
Brightness
adjusting 12
key location 15
Broken envelope icon 172
Browsing the web 266–270
Business card for beaming 30
button. See icon
Buttons
mapping 317
preferences 317
C
Calculator
buttons explained 79–80
memory 80
overview 79
recent calculations 79, 80
Calibration 13, 320
Call waiting
disabling 328
Call Waiting, disabling 328
Calling card, using in phone settings 329
Capital letters (Graffiti writing) 25
Capitalizing, CAPS key location 16
CAPS key
function 16
location 16
Card Info 83
Caring for the handheld 367
Categories
application 39–40
assigning records to 50–52
beaming 29–30
creating 53
default 39, 51
displaying 52, 78, 377
merging 54
renaming 53
using in Applications Launcher 39, 40
Category
for bookmarks 270, 271
for saved pages 274
Cc field 191
Certicom. See encryption
Chain calculations 80
Changing
bookmark information 271
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
395
History list size 279
home page 277
image download preferences 278
saved page information 274
text size 277
Characters, Graffiti 21
Check boxes 20
Clearing Calculator entries 79
Clearing reminders 172
Clearing the History list 276
Combining categories 54
Comma delimited files, importing data
from 32
Command
buttons 20
toolbar 45
Command bar in VersaMail 251
Command stroke key 44, 45, 46
Compressing Day view 100
Compression 263, 278
Conduits
for synchronizing applications 379, 295–
296, 370, 371
for synchronizing applications,
Macintosh 296–297
Configuring Palm Web Browser 283
Conflicting events 99
Connecting
service templates 330
to server or ISP 330
Connection
IR to PC 318
modifying preferences 281
selecting for network 327
speed, effect on browsing 263
Connection types
changing in account 241
GPRS, prerequisite for 144
GSM, prerequisite for 144
modem sled, prerequisite for 144
network connection 143
Palm Modem accessory, prerequisite
for 144
synchronize-only connection 143
Content
latest 269
old 269, 281
Continuous events
deleting from Date Book 50
scheduling 93
Contrast control 12
Contrast. See Brightness
Controlling Internet access 281
Cookies, enabling or disabling 279
Copying
notes into other applications 115
photos into other applications 121
text 48
Copying text 275
Cradle
connecting to computer 10
for local HotSync operations 302, 308
viewing data from 339
Creating
Address Book entries 74–75
categories 39–40, 53
currency symbols 107
custom fields in Address Book 78
Date Book events 88
Expense items 104
expense reports 109
notes for records 60
records 47
Currency
default 107
defining 107
for Expense items 106
Current date 377
Current time 37
Custom
currencies and symbols 107
fields in Address Book 78
Customizing Palm Web Browser 277–281
Cutting text 48
Cycling through views 74, 87
D
Data entry. See Entering data
Database, upgrading a MultiMail
database 142
Databases, backing up 254
Date
displaying in Clock 292
Expense item 105
setting 319
setting current 286, 377
setting preference 319
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
396
To Do List record due 138–139
Date Book
adding Address Book data to records 57
Agenda view 98
alarm 92
appointments, viewing reminders 171
archive files (.dba) 32
changing event time 91
changing event to untimed 91
conduit for synchronizing 295
conflicting events 99
continuous events 93–96
creating records 47, 88–91
Day view 96
deleting records 49
display options 100
end time for Day view 101
fonts 61
menus 99
Month view 97
notes for records 60
opening 87, 266
overview 87
private records 352
purging records 50
repeating events 50, 93–96
scheduling events 88–89, 268–270
selecting dates 90
start time for Day view 101
Sunday or Monday to start week 321
switching views 96
untimed events 88, 90
Week view 96, 321, 378
Day (Date Book view) 88, 100
Day, displaying in Clock 292
DBA (Date Book archive file) 32
Decimal point 321
Default 264
categories 39, 51
currency in Expense 107
Default setting
for autofill 278
for connection preferences 281
for cookies 279
for image download 278
Default size
of History list 276
of text 277
Delete key 16
Deleted data, saving in archive files 49
Deleting
applications 69
bookmarks 272
Desktop software 70
e-mail 212–215, 246
filters 240
Graffiti characters 23
History list 276
mail in the trash 215
old messages 214
passwords 341
plug-ins 282
records 49
saved pages 275
service templates 336
text 48
See also Purging records
Desktop software
displaying euro 109
linking to external files 33, 309
removing 70, 71
saving deleted data to an archive file 49
Digitizer 13, 320
Disabling
autofill 278
cookies 278
Disconnecting a modem 159
DNS (Domain Naming System) 332
Documents To Go
converting attachments 232–233
Double-booked events 99
Download message size 149, 155, 163, 226
Downloading
files, all types 268
plug-ins 282
stopping 269
Downloading attachments 180
Drafts
creating 188
saving 194, 197
Dragging
memos into other applications 111
using the stylus 14
E
Editing
bookmarks 271
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
397
saved pages 274
Editing records 47
E-mail 264
accessing corporate e-mail 256
adding Address Book entry from e-
mail 220
adding attachments 208–210
addresses in Address Book 75
addressing 191
alert for new mail 172
attaching files 169
attachments 202–212
backing up databases 254
beeping for new mail 171
buzzing or blinking for new mail 173
composing 194
copying and pasting text 251
creating new messages 190–194
days to synchronize 227
deleting messages on handheld 212–215
deleting messages on server 246
downloading large attachments 206–208
drafts 197
emptying trash 215–216
filters for 236–237
folder on server 246
forwarding 198, 199
forwarding attachments 212
getting entire message 169
getting on desktop 222–226
getting subject only 169
header details 253
icons 180, 197
leaving mail on server 148, 155, 162, 244
managing mail settings 240
marking read and unread 217–218
maximum message size 149, 155, 163,
226
notification filter 174
notification options 172
personal signature 197, 219
preferences 218–219
reading 168
replying to 199–201
sending 194
signature, adding 151, 157, 164
storing in Outbox 194
trash 215
viewing attachments 202–205
E-mail account
APOP setting 245
before setting up 143
changing e-mail address 243
changing mail server settings 244
changing protocol type 241
changing username and password 241
checking for new messages 168, 169
creating a synchronize-only
account 152–158
creating new 146–149, 155–156
default mail service 166–168, 242
deleting accounts 165–166
displaying Inbox 168
editing 164, 165
editing accounts 159–248
incoming and outgoing server 147, 154,
161
managing mail settings 240
notification filter 174
notification option 171
outgoing mail server 246
password 147, 153, 161
synchronization options 222–226
synchronizing 222, 234–235
username 147, 153, 161
Emptying the History list 276
Enabling
autofill 278
cookies 278
Encryption 264
Entering data
importing from other applications 32–35
problems with 377
using the computer keyboard 32
using the onscreen keyboard 17
Entries. See Address Book
Envelope icon 180
Error log 222
ESMTP 144, 247
adding to an account 249
Eudora, configuring for e-mail 231
Euro
displaying on desktop computer 109
in Expense 106, 107
in Graffiti writing 27
in onscreen keyboard 17
printing 109
Events. See Date Book
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
398
Exclamation marks in To Do List 139
Expansion Card
adding hardware 10
applications 38
copying applications 41
described 11
formatting 84
renaming 84
using cards 83
Expense
adding Address Book data to
records 57–58
categorizing records 51
creating records 104
currency 106
date of item 105
defining new currency 107
menus 109
overview 103
receipt details 105
reports 109
type 105, 110
vendor 106
Extended MAPI 224
F
FCC Statement 387
Files
converting attachments 232–233
error log 222
Files, linking to external 33, 309
Filters
creating 236–238
deleting 240
editing 240
examples of 239
notification for Palm.com account 174
turning on and off 238–239
Find key 16
Finding
Find key location 16
information in applications 54–58
Palm Web Browser version 282
phone numbers 57
plug-ins 281
using the Find application 56
visited pages 275–276
Folders
creating new 188
viewing other 182
Font size. See text size
Fonts 61, 109
Formats preferences 320
Forwarding 198
Forwarding e-mail 198
Frequently asked questions (FAQs)
application problems 377
beaming problems 383
HotSync problems 378
operating problems 375
recharging problems 384
software installation problems 374
tapping and writing problems 376
Frozen handheld 376
Function key
location 16
using 18
G
Games 322
General preferences 173, 315
alarm LED setting 322
alarm sounds 322
alarm vibrate setting 322
auto-off delay 339
system sounds 322
Getting e-mail
checking for new messages 169
Glossary. See Graffiti ShortCuts
GPRS
prerequisite for connection 144
Graffiti
accented characters 27
alphabet 21, 24
basic concepts 22
capital letters 25
moving the cursor 28
numbers 25
problems using 377
punctuation marks 26
ShortCuts for entering data 28
symbols 27
tips 23
Graphics pick list 278
graphics. See images
GSM
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
399
prerequisite for connection 144
H
Handheld
alarm 174
alerts for e-mail 174
blinking 173
buzzing 173
VersaMail button 172
vibrating 174
Handheld, increasing space on 11
Hard reset 369, 375
Hardware add-ons 10
Header field 175
Help 265
Help, online tips 21
Helper applications. See plug-ins
Hiding records 345
History list
changing size of 279
clearing 276
definition 267, 275
displaying old content 281
limitations on size 280
Home page
changing 277
returning to 268
HotSync
conduits for synchronizing
applications 295–296, 370, 371
conduits for synchronizing applications,
Mac 296
customizing 296
first-time operation 301–305, 310–313
IR operation 306–309
linking to external files 33, 309
local operation 294, 302, 379
local operation on Mac 304
modem operation 294, 380–381
network operation 297–301
operations using cradle 308, 317
operations using IR port 306–308, 318–
319
problems launching application 379
problems with 378–383
problems with IR 382
restoring data 370–371
setting options 293–294
starting Manager 221
synchronize active accounts 222
synchronizing e-mail 235
using with another PIM 70
hyperlink. See link
IIcon
alarm 92
application 40
Back 267
Forward 268
Home 268
note 60
online Tips 21
Open URL 266
plug-in application 281
Refresh 269
repeating event 94
Security 264
Stop 269
Tips 265
Web Content 271
Icons
broken envelope 172
for e-mail messages 180, 197
HotSync Manager 221
paperclip 180
VersaMail e-mail 180
Idle timeout of ISP or server connection 331
Images
behavior in Palm Web Browser 263
changing download preferences 278
copying 275
IMAP
adding an account 146, 153, 160
ESMTP synchronization in 225
root mailbox 246
server options 148, 155, 162
synchronize an account 225
wireless folder sychronization 255
Importing data 32–35
Inbox
Reminders list and 172
synchronizing 227
viewing mail 168–169
Incoming mail server 147, 153, 154, 161
changing 244
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
400
Indicator light
problems 376
setting 322
Infrared
connections 318
HotSync operations 306–308, 318–319
PC connection 318
port 8, 306
problems with IR HotSync
operations 382
requirements for computer 306
Initialization string 318
Installing
applications 63–69
conduit to install applications 295
plug-ins 281
International characters
keyboard 16
typing 16
International characters, Graffiti writing 27
Internet
password 326
selecting connection 327
username 326
Internet access 281
IP address 330, 332
IR port.
See also Beaming and Infrared
IR. See Infrared
IrCOMM 306, 318
IrDA (Infrared Data Association) 306
ISPlogin script 144
requirements for 143
requiring APOP 245, 248, 249
requiring ESMTP 249
Items. See To Do List or Expense
J
Jumping to another web page 267
K
Keyboard
computer 32
description 15
key clicking 323
key repeat rate 323
keyboard type 15
onscreen 17
press-and-hold 323
remapping keys 323
setting preferences 322
Keyboard shortcuts in VersaMail 260
L
Launcher.See Applications Launcher
Launching
Palm Web Browser 266
LED alarm 322
Letters
font style 61
Graffiti 21, 24
onscreen keyboard 17
Link 267, 268, 281
List, in Applications Launcher 40
Location
setting primary 286, 287
setting secondary 288
Locking the handheld with a password 338,
341–344
Logging informational errors 222
Login script 144, 333–336
Looking up Address Book data
to add to other records 57
scrolling in Address list 54
Lost
handheld, contact for 75
records 377
Lotus Notes, selecting as mail client 224
Lotus Organizer, importing data from 32
M
Mac computer, system requirements 4
Mail server settings, changing 244
Mail service, default service for e-mail
account 166–168, 242
Mail settings
changing e-mail address 243
changing mail server settings 244
changing protocol type 241
changing username and password 241
managing 240
Mailbox, adding new 146
Maintenance information 367
Marking messages unread/read 217
Maximum message size
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
401
for HotSync operation 226
incoming e-mail 149, 155, 163
POP and IMAP server 244
Memo Pad
adding Address Book data to records 57
archive files (.mpa) 32
conduit for synchronizing 295
creating records 47
deleting records 49, 95
dragging memos into other
applications 111
fonts 61
menus 81, 113
opening 111
private records 352
reviewing memos 112
sorting records 59, 377
Memory
for beaming 383
Calculator 80
copying text to 275
freeing 276
handling content in 263
limitations on History list 267, 279
regaining 50, 375
Memos. See Memo Pad
Menu bar 265, 267
Menu commands 44, 45
accessing 19
key location 16
using 45
Menus 43–44, 45
Address Book 77
choosing 44
command equivalents (Graffiti
writing) 44, 45
command toolbar 45
commands 45
Date Book 99, 291
Edit menu 48
Expense 109
key location 16
Memo Pad 81, 113, 119
menu bar 19, 43
menu commands 19
Network Preferences 336
Palm Photos 133
problems 376
To Do List 140
Web Browser 283
Microsoft Exchange 5.0 224
Microsoft Outlook
connecting to 379
synchronizing with 224
Microsoft Outlook Express
configuring for e-mail 230
selecting as mail client 224
Modem
auto-disconnect 159
HotSync operations via 380–381
initialization string 318
initializing 159
preferences 158
timeout 159
Modem sled, prerequisite for
connection 144
Modifying
connection preferences 281
History list size 279
home page 277
image download preferences 278
text size 277
Monday, to start week 321
Month (Date Book view) 97, 100
Moving the cursor (Graffiti writing) 28
MPA (Memo Pad archive file) 32
MultiMediaCard 7
See also Expansion Card
Multiple addressees 191
N
Navigator 14
accessing international characters 17
description 9
in VersaMail 258
location 8, 9
look up Address Book record 55
scroll 21
scroll in Address Book 75
Netscape 224
Network
connecting 330
HotSync operation 297–301
idle timeout 331
login scripts 333–336
password 326
phone settings 327
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
402
primary DNS 332
secondary DNS 332
selecting connection 327
selecting service 325
user name 326
Network connection 143
connection methods 143
GPRS, prerequisite for 144
GSM, prerequisite for 144
modem sled, prerequisite for 144
Palm Modem accessory, prerequisite
for 144
Note Pad
alarm 118
copying notes into other
applications 115
menus 119
opening 115
overview 115
reviewing notes 116
Notes, attaching to records 60
Notification filters 174
Notification option
changing the sound 173
filter for Palm.com account 174
Palm.com account 172–173
Numbers
decimal point and thousands
separator 321
Graffiti writing 25
onscreen keyboard 17
O
Old content 269, 281
Old messages, deleting 212
Onscreen keyboard 17, 49
Opening
Address Book 73
applications 37
bookmarked pages 271
Calculator 79
Clock 285
Date Book 87, 266
Memo Pad 111
Note Pad 115
Palm Photos 121
Palm Web Browser 266
saved pages 274
To Do List 135
Organizer (Lotus PIM) 32
Outbox 188
storing e-mail 194
synchronizing 227
Outgoing server, settings 147, 154, 161, 246
Outlook, connecting to 379
Overlapping events 99
Overview of Palm Web Browser 263–265
Owner preferences 338
P
Pages. See web pages
Palm Desktop Link
e-mail notification 173
Palm Modem accessory, prerequisite for
connection 144
Palm OS database 268, 282
Palm OS upgrade 3
Palm Photos
copying photos into other
applications 121
menus 133
opening 121
Palm.com account
e-mail alert 173
e-mail forwarding 172
notification filter 174
notification option 171, 172
notification sound 173
Paperclip icon 180
Password 147, 153, 161
changing 241, 341
deleting 341
editing in account 159
for network 326
forgotten 344, 384
Pasting
notes into other applications 115
photos into other applications 121
Pasting text 49
Payment, Expense item 106
PDB. See Palm OS database
Peripheral hardware 10
Phone
Lookup 57
settings for ISP or dial-in server 328
Phone numbers
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
403
selecting for Address list 76
selecting types 75
Pick lists 20
pictures. See images
PIM (personal information manager), using
HotSync Manager with 70
Plug-ins 233, 281, 282, 335
POP accounts, APOP synchronization in 225
POP3 accounts 148, 155, 162
adding an account 146, 153, 160
Port number 245, 247
Ports
IR on handheld 306
serial 4, 5
USB 4, 5
Power button 8
PPP 330
PRC (application file extension) 335
PRC. See Applications
Preferences
Advanced 216
Buttons 317
choosing 46
Connection 317–319
cradle setting 339
Date and Time 319–320
deleting e-mail 218
Digitizer 320
Formats 320
General 315, 321, 339
getting mail 218
Keyboard 322–324
mail databases 254
modem 158
Network 325–336
Owner 338
Security 340–352
ShortCuts 355
Trash 216
viewing 316
Primary DNS 332
Prioritizing To Do List records 136, 140
Private records
displaying and creating 345–352, 377
lost with forgotten password 344
Profile 226
Profile, Mobile user 309
Protocol, changing type 241
Punctuation marks
Graffiti writing 26
Purging
records 50
See also Deleting
Push e-mail 172
R
Range of times in Day view 101
Read messages, marking 217
Reading e-mail 168–180
Receipts, recording in Expense 105
Recharging the battery 339
Records
beaming 29–30
choosing categories 50
creating 47
Date Book 88
defined 47
deleting 49, 95
displaying a category of 52
editing 47
Expense 104
fonts 61
hiding private 340, 345
lost 377
masking private 340
Memo Pad 111
notes for 60
private 345–352
purging 50
sorting 58–59
To Do List 136
unmasking individual 352
Refreshing a page 269
Reminder lists 62
Reminders list
types of reminders 171
using 172
viewing 171
Removing
applications 69
bookmarks 272
Desktop software 70
plug-ins 282
saved pages 275
Renaming
bookmarks 271
saved pages 274
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
404
Renaming categories 53
Repeating events
deleting from Date Book 50
scheduling 93
Replying to e-mail 199
Rescheduling events 91
Resetting handheld
hard reset 369, 375
location of reset button 10, 368
soft reset 368
Restoring data
Mac 371
Windows 370
Returning
to a page in History list 276
to a web page 267
to your home page 268
Running
Palm Web Browser 266
S
Saved pages
definition 272
deleting 275
opening 274
renaming 274
viewing information about 270
Saving
data 38, 47, 49
e-mail databases 254
e-mail messages 214
Saving pages 272
Scheduling events 88–91
Screen
blank 375
calibrating 13, 320
caring for 367
touching with your finger 9
Scroll bar 21
SD card 7
SDIO card 7, 10
Searching. See Finding
Secondary DNS 332
Security 264, 340–355
changing password 341
deleting password 341
forgotten password 344
private records 345–352
setting a password hint 340
unmasking individual records 352
Selecting
date for event 90
phone numbers in Address Book 75
text 48, 49
Sending
e-mail 194
Serial port 4, 5, 294
Server
deleting messages on 216, 219
sent mail folder 246
Service
selecting for network 325
templates 330, 336
Settings. See Preferences
ShortCuts
backing up 295
for entering data 19, 356
key location 16
managing 355–356
menu commands 44, 45
predefined 29
preferences 355
using 19, 28
Signature 151, 157, 164
attaching personal 197–198, 219
SMAPI (Simple MAPI) 224
Smart Addressing
turning on 194
using 193
SMTP settings 246
Soft reset 368
Sorting
applications 39
records 58–59, 377
Sound
alarm on handheld 174
changing for mail notification 173
Sounds. See Alarm and System sounds
Special characters, typing 16
Speed 264, 269, 278
Spelling correction, automatic 15
Starting
Palm Web Browser 266
Starting applications 37
Stopping a download 269
Stylus
dragging with 14
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
405
tapping with 13
Sunday, to start week 321
Symbol key 16
Symbol, for currency 106
Symbols
in Graffiti writing 27
Synchronize-only account, creating 152–158
Synchronize-only connection 143
Synchronizing an existing username 142
Synchronizing e-mail 234–235
active accounts 235
e-mail applications for 224
HotSync operation 222
logging errors 222
setting how many days 227
turn off synchronization 235
Synchronizing IMAP folders 255
System
conduit 295
sounds 322
System requirements 3
T
Tab delimited files, importing data from 32
Tab key 15
Tapping 13
TCP/IP 325
TDA (To Do List archive file) 32
Technical support 373, 385
Text
copying 48
copying and pasting in e-mail 251
cutting 48
entry. See Entering data
files, importing data from 32, 34
fonts for 61
selecting all 49
Text size 277
Thousands separator 321
Time
alarm setting 92
format 321
setting current 287, 319
setting event 88
setting preference 319
start and end for Date Book Day
view 101
Time Zone 289
setting 320
Tips 265
Tips, online 21
Title bar 264, 269
To 243
To Do List
adding Address Book data to records 57
archive files (.tda) 32
categorizing records 50, 140
checking off items 137
completed items 139
completion date 139
conduit for synchronizing 295
creating records 47
deleting records 49, 95
due date 138–139
fonts 61
menus 140
notes for records 60
opening 135
overview 135
prioritizing records 136, 140
private records 352
purging records 50, 139
sorting records 59
To Do List tasks, viewing reminders 171
To field 191
Today. See Current date
Trash
automatically emptying 216
creating other folders 188
emptying deleted e-mail 215–216
setting frequency in preferences 216
Troubleshooting 382
Turning off handheld
automatically 339
problems with 376
Turning on handheld
displaying owner’s name 338
power button 8
problems with 375
U
Undoing actions 48
Uniform Resource Locator. See web address
Uninstalling
plug-ins 282
Uninstalling Desktop software 70
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential
Index
406
Universal connector 10, 317
Unread mail 148, 155, 162, 244
Unread messages, marking 217
Unresponsive handheld 376
Untimed events 88, 90, 91, 93
Upgrading 3
Upgrading a MultiMail database 142
URL. See web address
USB
infrared communication 308
Local tab settings 294
port 4, 5
User profiles, HotSync operation with 312–
313
Username 147, 153, 161
changing 241
editing in account 159
entering 241
for ISP 326
identifying handheld 338
synchronizing existing 142
V
vCal 32
vCard 32
Vendor for Expense item 106
VersaMail
icons 180, 197
setting preferences for 218
VersaMail application 141–261
Vibrate alarm 174, 322
Viewing
page information 270
plug-in content 281–282
Visiting
bookmarked pages 271
web pages 266
Voice jack 10
W
Web address
changing home page 277
definition 263
entering in Palm Web Browser 266
Web Browser
menus 283
Web Library 283
Web page
displaying old content 269, 281
list of visited 276
refreshing 269
saved 272
Web Panel Preferences panel 283
Week (Date Book view) 96–97, 321, 378
Windows, system requirements 4
Wireless connections 263, 281
Wireless modem 159
Wireless Preferences panel. See Web Panel
Preferences panel
Wireless service provider
password 326
username 326
World Clock
alarm 291
alarm preferences 292
display options 292
menus 291
opening 285
Time Zone 289
Writing area 8
Writing. See Entering data
DRAFT Palm, Inc. Confidential

Navigation menu